高一英语学案Units 7-8 (B1)(人教版高一英语教案教学设计)
【简介】感谢网友“若兰”参与投稿，下面小编为大家带来高一英语学案Units 7-8 (B1)(人教版高一英语教案教学设计)（共18篇），希望大家喜欢!
篇1：高一英语学案Units 19-20 (B1)(人教版高一英语教案教学设计)
【知识网络】
一、重点词汇与短语
1．effect的用法小结：
（1）常用来表示“结果”的意思。例如：
Effects presuppose causes.
一种结果必然会有其原因。
One of the side effects of this drug is the easiness of habit-forming.
这种药的副作用之一就是容易上瘾。
（2）常用短语：
①in effect：正在实行；实际上
The old system is still in effect. 旧制度仍有效。
He is, in effect, my rival. 实际上他是我的竞争对手。
②take effect：开始；实行；开始生效
The medicine quickly took effect. 药很快见效了。
The contract has taken effect since October 1. 本合同从十月一日起已经生效。
③to... effect：大意是…。注意：此处的to为介词，它与effect之间经常有一个表示程度的词。
例如：
He called me a fool, or words to that effect. 他叫我呆子或诸如此类的话。
④have effect(s) on/upon sb./sth.：对某人某物有影响。
have no/good/bad… effect on/upon sb./sth.：对某人某物没有/有好的/坏的…影响。
例如：
Alcoholic drink can have a bad effect on your body.
含酒精的饮料会对你身体有很坏的影响。
The medicine had no effect on him. 这种药对他没有什么作用。
（3）effect: 作为动词，它经常用作及物动词，意思是“实现”。
例如：
The reform was effected. 改革实现了。
The new minister hopes to effect changes in the government's policy.
这位新部长希望改变政府的政策。
The new manager effected several changes in the company.
新来的经理在公司里促成了好几次改革。
2． certain的用法小结：
（1）certain常用作形容词，意思是：“确实的；无疑的；可靠的，一定会的。”
例如：
The evidence is certain and the facts are clear. 证据确凿,事实清楚。
I am certain he told me to come at two o'clock. 我肯定他告诉我两点来。
There's no certain cure for this illness at present. 现在这种病尚无确实可靠的疗法。
I'm certain she saw me. 我确信她看到我了。
We are certain of victory. 我们一定会获得胜利。
Are you certain that you'll get there in time? 你有把握及时赶到那里吗?
（2）certain：指“某个人/物”。
例如：
a lady of a certain age：某个年龄的女士
He was looking for a certain book. 他在找某本书。
（3）指“有些；一些”。
例如：
Certain plants will not grow in this country. 有些植物在这个国家不能生长。
People who smoke cannot travel in certain parts of the train.
吸烟的人不能在火车的某些地方走动。
二、词义辨析
1．effect, consequence, result的区别：
（1）这三个词作为名词在一起比较的一般含义是由某种原因所产生的结果。
effect 和原因的关系是立刻性的，即马上可以看到的
Jasper has put up “No Parking” signs outside his gate, but these have not had any effect.
贾斯珀“把禁止停车”的牌子挂在大门外，但这没产生什么效果。
The idea to have the capital moved so far inland will have a great effect on the future of Brazil.
把首都远迁内地的这一主张对巴西的未来将产生巨大的影响。
The drug has had an immediate effect on the patient.
此药对病人立刻产生了效果。
（2）consequence 和原因的关系没有那么紧密，并非马上可以可见。
You should be responsible for all the consequences.
你应当为这一切后果承担责任。
Do you know what the consequences of your action will be?
你知道你的行为将会产生什么后果吗？
The consequence was that he caught a bad cold.
结果是他得了重感冒。
（3）result 虽然和原因关系密切，却不是立即可见，而是最后才能显示出的。比方某人头部受到沉重的一击，马上产生的脑震荡(此为effect)。脑震荡后他的身体渐渐垮了(即consequence)，最后不能从事正常工作了(即result)
When the first radio messages have been received, the results of the trip will be announced immediately.
当收到第一批无线电信息时，这次太空之行的结果将立即公布出去。
His limp is the result of a car accident last year.
他的跛足是去年一次车祸所致的结果。
注：consequence 和result 都可以用复数形式，而effect 一般常用单数，有时也用复数形式表示“结果”。
2．Produce, product 与production的区别：
（1）produce: 主要作为动词使用，意思是“出产；生产；提出；拿出”等。有时也可以作名词使用，意思是“产物，产品”，多指农产品，为不可数名词。
to produce wheat：出产小麦
That factory produces cars. 那家工厂生产小汽车。
to produce one's ticket：出示票
Can you produce any proof of your nationality? 你能出示有关你国藉的任何证件吗?
The whisky bottle was marked 'Produce of Scotland'. 这瓶威士忌酒上标有'苏格兰出品'的字样。
（2）product意义较为广泛，也是最普通的表示“产品，产物”的词，它可以用来指天然的、人造的产品，也可以用来指农产品，还可以指脑力劳动的结果等。
例如：
Petrol is the most important product of many Middle-East countries.
石油是许多中东国家最重要的产品。
The company sells plastic products. 这家公司出售塑料制品。
Criminals are sometimes the product of less education. 犯罪有时是缺乏教育的结果。
（3）production：意思是“生产，产量”。指“生产”时侧重其行为，而指“产品”时，侧重“产量”，也可以指文学作品。
例如：
the production of wheat：小麦生产
The production of corn has increased. 玉米的产量已增加。
Production of computers has increased double in the last few weeks.
近几周来电脑的产量增加了一倍。
This new theatre is becoming known for its good productions.
这家新剧院因上演节目的质量好而渐渐出名。
This book on education is his latest production.
这本论述教育的书是他的最新作品。
三、重点句型:
1．What affects do you think the changes in eating habits will have on agricultural or nature?
此句中的do you think为插入语，句子的疑问语序由do you think来体现，所以其它成分就用陈述语序。
2．It is on this arable land that farmers produce food for the whole population of China.
此句为强调句型。句中的on this arable land为状语，是被强调的成分，值得注意的是其后的连接词只能用that，而不能用where；同样表示时间的状语被强调时，也只能用that， 不用when。
例如：
It was on the morning of last Monday that I met Dr Johnson on the bus. 我是在上个星期一的早上在公共汽车上遇到的约翰逊博士。
3．Not only is food production important but also taking care of the environment.
Not only…but also…连接的句子中，当not only置于句首时，其后的句子用倒装语序。此句中，but also后的句子为省略句。
再如：
Not only will we have classes in the hall, but also the students of Class 19.
不仅我们要在大厅里上课，19班的学生也会（在大厅里上课）。
4．The temperature is controlled with computers, no matter how the weather is outside.
注意此句中的no matter how引导的是让步状语从句。be controlled with中“with”为介词意思是“用”。
再如：
No matter what I said, they wouldn’t let me in. 无论我说什么，他们也不让我进去。
The movement of the ball is controlled with a stick. 那个球的动作是用一根操作棒进行的。
四、语法复习
-ing形式作定语和宾语补足语：
1．-ing形式作定语：
（1）表示被修饰的名词是分词的动作的发出者。可以放在被修饰的词前，叫做前置定语；也可以放在其后面，叫做后置定语。单个的或者仅仅带有一个副词的分词常作前置定语；而分词短语通常作后置定语。前置定语通常表示一种相对的持久性、一种特征，更象一个形容词；后置定语比较突出分词的动作。
例如：
the weeping girl （哭泣的女孩）
a boring speaker （令人厌倦的演讲者）
freely falling body (自由落体)
the boys playing in the garden（在花园里玩耍的男孩子们）
the man standing behind her（站在她身后的男子）
（2）-ing形式短语作定语时，常常表示一个与谓语动词的动作同时发生的动作。
例如：
Do you know the man speaking to my sister?
你认识和我姐姐说话的那个人吗？
The young man sitting in the third row is a famous doctor.
坐在第三排的那个年轻人是个著名的医生。
（3）-ing形式短语在特指的名词之后作定语时，通常只含有“正在进行”的意思。但当用在一个泛指的名词之后作定语时，可以表示“进行”的意思，也可以表示一般的情况。
例如：
The students working in the factory will go back to school next week. （特指，表示正在进行。）
正在工厂工作的那些学生下周将回学校。
Matter is anything having weight and occupying space. （泛指，表示一般情况。）
凡是物质，都具有重量，并占有空间。
（4）being所引导的-ing短语不能作定语，但是其被动语态“being + v-ed”可以。
例如：
The car being repaired there is our headmaster’s.
那辆正在修理的车是我们校长的。
In Europe there are very few wooden houses being built today.
在欧洲，目前很少有人在建木头房子了。
2．-ing形式作宾语补足语：强调动作的进行。只有几类动词可以用-ing形式作宾语补足语：
表示知觉的：see, watch, notice, observe, find, think, feel, hear, smell, listen to, look at
表示“使役”的：have, make, get等。
表示“愿望”的：want, wish, expect, like等。
表示“致使”的：set, keep, catch, leave等。
表示“认为”的：regard, accept, think等。
His remark left me wondering. 他的话让我惊讶。
I hope I haven’t kept you waiting too long. 我希望我没有让你久等。
I saw her walking alone. 我看到她独自走着。
【考点透视 考例精析】
[考点] 强调句与定语从句。
[考例1] --Is it that Tom often plays computer games ________ makes his parents worry about him?
--Yes, I think so.
A．what B．that C．when D．which
[解析] B 考查强调句型以及定语从句的混合结构。被强调的部分是that引导的定语从句。而要选的that是强调句中的连接词。
[考点] 可数名词与不可数名词。
[考例2] He is a man with ________ of staying in France for 20 years.
A．experience B．experiences C．an experience D．a experience
[解析] C experience表示“经验”时，为不可数名词；表示“经历”时为可数名词。本句中，“他是一个有…经历的人”，所以应为可数名词，前面加an。
[拓展] experience表示“经验”为不可数名词。例如：
Does he have much experience in teaching?
他教学经验丰富吗？
[考点] 疑问的强调句结构。
[考例3] Why! I have nothing to confess. __________ you want me to say?
A．What is it that B．What it is that
C．How is it that D．How it is that
[解析] A 注意的是：有时被强调的部分是疑问词，这时，除了注意分析疑问词的作用外，还要注意其它成分的语序。
【基础演练】
一、根据所给首字母或括号中的汉语意思填写句子空格中所缺的单词。
1．Her coat gave her p_________ from the rain.
2．The d__________ of oil on their land made the people rapidly rich.
3．Our teacher is showing us a new m__________ of writing.
4．This kind of medicine tastes b________ at first, but then it turns a little sweet.
5．It will not prove difficult to o___________ a machine like a small radio.
6． ___________(进口) of cars rose last month.
7．The playground of our school is in very good ___________(状况) now.
8．It is a __________(传统) that the young look after the old in their family.
9．___________(幸运), the planes appear to be quite safe.
10．In order to improve the ___________(产量) of grain, they have worked in the fields for 10 years.
二、单项填空：
1．“We can’t go out in this weather,” said Bob _________ out of the window.
A．looking B．to look C．looked D．having looked
2．In some parts of London, missing a bus means ____________ for another hour.
A． waiting B．to wait C．wait D．to be waiting
3．_______of the land in that district ________ covered with trees and grass.
A．Two fifth, is B．Two fifth, are C．Two fifths, is D．Two fifths, are
4．–It’s a good idea. But who is going to _________ the plan?
--I think George and Jack will.
A．set aside B．carry out C．take in D．get through
5．It’s not _______ so easy as you think.
A．nearly B．almost C．most D．very
6．He was born and ________ in the countryside, so he has got into the habit of _______ early.
A．risen, getting B．raised, rising
C．grown up, getting up D．brought up, rising up
7．In early _______ farmers in China moved around and ________ more sheep and cattle.
A． times, fed B．days, feed C．time, feeding D．age, raising
8．--Did you remember to give Mary the money you owned her?
--Yes. I gave it to her _________ I saw her.
A．while B．the moment C．suddenly D．once
9．Living abroad alone is hard for me. There is not enough money ______ me ________ pretty clothes, and I must save each coin to _________ my expensive cost of school.
A．allow, buying, spend on B．allowing, to buy, pay for
C． to allow, buy, cost D．allow, to buy, take
10． Our boss said that he had debts __________$20,000 at the moment.
A．in amount B．the full amount
C．o the amount of D．a large amount of
【能力拓展】
完形填空
I told her everything that had happened to me in Dr Webber's secret brain-research Lab, out on the other side of Crystal Town. I showed her the photos I had 1 taken with a hidden micro-camera. I told her about my best friend--Plummet, who had 2 with me. I told her how he was afraid to come to the police, She 3 again.
“Don't you worry, Mr Serge. You've got nothing to 4 from us. If you can take us to this Research Lab, we will come with you 5 and close the place down. This Dr Webber sounds very 6 . ” Her words were like music to my ears. I 7 with relief. Twenty minutes later, we were on a 8 boat, racing back across Piccadilly Lake, on our way back to the Research Lab, with six officers, all 9 with nerve guns.
The 10 of Dr Webber being shot with a nerve gun and arrested made me very 11 -but I was also frightened. 12 back to that place was the last thing I wanted to do. I suddenly felt very 13 . I lay down in the back of the boat and watched the paragliders(滑翔机) and balloons 14 by overhead. They must have banned (禁止) motor vehicles from the London sky 15 I was away. It was much more 16 up there. Better than the noisy jet-cars and helicopters that used to block out the 17 . My eyes closed and I fell asleep. I slept until I heard a voice 18 in my ear.
“Serge. Wake up !”
It was Plummet, talking into my tiny micro-radio. He had been 19 me from the roof of a nearby tower-block.
“ 20 ! You're in trouble!”
1． A．quickly B．secretly C．excitedly D．frequently
2． A．escaped B．stayed C．suffered D．struggled
3． A．stopped B．cried C．rested D．smiled
4． A．fear B．ask C．keep D．steal
5． A．after all B．on time C．at last D．right now
6． A．interesting B．powerful C．dangerous D．strange
7． A．chatted B．sighed C．laughed D．said
8． A．research B．fishing C．travel D．police
9． A．covered B．armed C．carried D．brought
10．A．thought B．idea C．sight D．dream
11．A．sleepy B．surprised C．happy D．nervous
12．A．Walking B．Sailing C．Going D．Running
13．A．hopeless B．tired C．excited D．sick
14．A．flying B．passing C．moving D．floating
15．A．while B．because C．where D．since
16．A．peaceful B．beautiful C．gentle D．natural
17．A．Lab B．boat C．sky D．place
18．A．shouting B．whispering C．speaking D．sounding
19．A．calling B．watching C．following D．expecting
20．A．Hurry up B．Get up C．Wake up D．Look up
参考答案
高一部分
Units 19-20 (B1)
基础演练
一、1. protection 2. discovery 3. method 4. bitter 5. operate 6. Imports 7. condition 8. tradition 9. Fortunately 10. production
二、1-5 AACBA 6-10 BABBC
能力拓展
1-5 BADAD 6-10 CBDBA 11-15 CCBDA 16-20 ACBBA
1．B 既然是hidden微型摄像机，那当然是偷偷地拍摄的。
2．A 从下文的内容可知我们是逃跑出来的。
3．D 从下文的“她的声音像音乐”可知这里不可选其他项。
4．A 不要害怕。
5．D 我们现在就和你一起去那个地方。
6．C 下文说他们带着枪，可见他们觉得这个人是危险分子。
7．B 我如释重负地长叹一口气。
8．D 下面提到警官和枪，因此本题选D。
9．B 这里用be armed with表示“用……武装”。
10．A 我们还在路上，当我想像这幕情景的时候。
11．C 这种想像的内容当然让我觉得很高兴。
12．C 我最不愿意回到那个鬼地方。
13．B 下文说我躺在船上看天空，后来睡着了，此举与B有关。
14．D 从头顶飘忽着过去。
15．A 当我不在的时候。
16．A 从下文说的内容可知选A，那里的天空很安静，比飞机的声音好些。
17．C 既然是直升飞机，当然是在天空。
18．B 从下文可知这里是冤家我们要找的人从附近高塔上对着我的小传声收音机说话’
19．B 他在塔顶看着我。
20．A 本题选A，“动作快点”。此时我已经醒了。
篇2：高一英语学案Units 21-22 (B1)(人教版高一英语教案教学设计)
【知识网络】
一、重点词汇与短语
1．manage 的用法小结：
（1）经常用作及物动词，意思是“管理；处理； 支配”。常接名词作宾语。
例如：
He managed the supermarket when the owner was away.
当主人不在的时候，他管理这个超级市场。
She doesn’t know how to manage her children.
她不知道如何管理自己的孩子。
（2）表示“能应付，设法做成某件事”时，常用“manage to do sth.”结构，而且常用一般过去时态。
例如：
The pilot managed to circle the balloon for some time.
这位飞行员设法绕气球飞了一阵。
At first, no ready technical data were available, but we managed to go without.
起初,我们没有现成的技术资料,但也设法照样干下去了。
He managed to avoid an accident. 他设法避免了一场事故。
（3）manage to do sth. 与try to do sth.的区别：前者强调设法完成了某件事情，表示结果等于词组“succeed in doing sth.”；而后者强调尽力去做某件事情，表示动作;相当于“do one’s best to do sth”。
例如：
We managed to get there on time.
我们设法按时到达了那里。（结果是按时到达了。）
We tried to get there on time.
我们尽力想按时到达那里。（不知是否成功。）
2． ahead的用法小结：
（1）作为副词使用，ahead表示“在前；向前；提前”的意思。
例如：
Walk straight ahead until you reach the river. 一直朝前走到河边。
The road ahead was full of cattle. 前面的路上挤满了牛群。
（2）“ahead of”的意思是“在…之前，超过”。
例如：
Our company is ahead of other makers of spare parts for the airplane.
我们公司制造飞机零部件比别家的业绩好。
He is ahead of his times in his ideas. 他的思想走在时代的前列。
（3）get ahead表示“前进，成功，发迹”。
例如：
He got ahead in his study.
他在学习方面成功了。
（4）go ahead表示“前进，干吧，用吧”。
例如：
--May I borrow your bike?
--Yes, go ahead.
二、词义辨析
1．match, suit与fit的区别：这三个词都有“适合、匹配”的意思。
（1）match多指大小、色调、形状、性质等方面的搭配。
例如：
They are equally matched in their knowledge of Chinese.
他们在中文的造诣上相等。
This hotel can't be matched for friendliness.（引申意义）
这家旅馆良好的服务态度是无与伦比的。
（2）suit多指合乎需要、口味、性格、条件、地位等。
例如：
That'll suit me fine. 那对我太合适了。
No dish suits all tastes. 众口难调。
（3）fit多指尺寸、形状合适，引申为“吻合、协调”。
例如：
Her new coat didn't fit, so she took them back to the shop and changed them for another one.
“她那件上衣不合穿,所以她去商店换了一件。”
Your trousers fit well. 你的裤子很合身。
The shoes don't fit him, they are too small.
这双鞋子他穿不合脚，太小了。
2．unlike与dislike、like的区别：
（1）unlike可以作介词和形容词，意思是“不相似的、不同的”。
例如：
She is unlike her mother; she is tall and her mother is very short.
她不像她妈妈；她很高，而她妈妈很矮。
They gave unlike accounts of the incident.
他们对这件事情的描述各不相同。
（2）dislike可以用作动词和名词，但不能用作介词，是“不喜爱、厌恶”的意思。
例如：
Some people dislike big cities. （作动词）
有些人不喜欢大城市。
She strongly disliked being spoken to like that. （作动词）
她很不喜欢别人对她这样说话。
I felt a strong dislike of the new teacher. （作名词）
我感到很不喜欢这个新教员。
（3）dislike与like不同。后接动词时，dislike习惯上只接动词-ing形式，不能接动词不定式，特别在英国英语中更是如此。
例如：
I dislike having to get up so early.
我不喜欢那么早起床。
三、重点句型
1．There are also differences as to how often we touch each other, how close we stand to someone we are talking to, and how we act when we meet and part.
注意此句中how引导的几个并列结构；另外，名词difference的复数形式表示具体的不同点，如果difference表示“不同”这个概念，则是不可数名词，无复数形式。
2．And if we are feeling down or lonely, there is nothing better than to see the smiling face of a good friend.
“There is nothing better than to do…”此处表示“没有比…更好的了”。
例如：
There is nothing better than to sit in a pub drinking.
没有比坐在酒吧里喝酒更好的事了。
3．Words a are important, but the way a person stands, folds his or her arms, or moves his or her hands can also give us information about his or her feelings.
此句中用了几个并列的谓语动词，要注意英语并列成分的规则：除了最后一个并列成分之前用一个并列连词以外，前面的并列成分都可以用逗号隔开。
再如：
While they were walking, they were talking, laughing and playing games. （并列的-ing形式）
Note: 要注意并列的成分的前后一致性，这是单项填空的常考题型。
四、语法复习
(一) 动词的-ng形式作主语、宾语和表语：
1）动词的-ing形式作主语时，常表示概括性的或者一般性的行为。例如：
Fighting broke out between the South and the North. 南方与北方开战了。
Losing her new bicycle made her so upset.
她的新自行车丢了，搞得她心烦意乱。
2）动词的-ing形式作宾语时，既可以作动词的宾语，又可以作介词的宾语。 某些动词或者动词短语后常接动词-ing形式作宾语。
例如：
Would you mind turning on your radio, please? I want to hear the hour’s news.
请你打开收音机好吗？我想听听本时的新闻。
The sparrow was so lucky that it just missed being caught.
那只麻雀真幸运，它刚好没有被射中。
3）动词的-ing形式可以作表语，表示“什么事是某事”。
例如：
Her job is washing，cleaning and taking care of the children.
她的工作是洗衣服、打扫卫生和看小孩。
Seeing is believing. 眼见为实。
（二）动词的-ing形式作状语：
动词的-ing形式作状语时，其逻辑主语一定是句子的主语，动词的-ing形式可以表示时间、条件、原因、方式或者伴随等情况，v-ing与句子的主语构成主动关系。
例如：
As I didn't receive any letter from him, I gave him a call.
Not receiving any letter from him, I gave him a call.
由于没有收到他的信，我给他打了电话。
If more attention was given to them, the trees could have grown better.
如果多多护理的话，这些树本来能够长得更好的。
Given more attention，the trees could have grown better.
假如多给些照顾，那些树会长得更好。
Many people come to the theme parks, looking for thrills and entertainment.
许多人来到主题公园寻求刺激和娱乐。
（三）动词的-ing形式作定语：
单个动词-ing形式作定语，常位于被修饰的词前；-ing形式短语作定语，常放在被修饰的词后。
例如：
We can see the rising sun. 我们可以看到从东方升起的太阳
He is a retired worker. 他是位退休的工人
There was a girl sitting there. 有个女孩坐在那里。
This is the question given. 这是所给的问题（个别分词如given, left等，尽管是单个的，但常放在被修饰的词后面）
There is nothing interesting. 没有有趣的东西（修饰不定代词的词，常放在被修饰的词后）
（四）动词的-ing形式作宾语补足语：
-ing形式作宾语补足语时，通常在感官动词和使役动词之后，表示一个主动的动作正在进行。值得注意的是：过去分词也可以作宾语补足语，但它们一般表示被动和完成。
例如：
The missing boys were last seen playing near the river.
那些孩子在失踪之前，人们曾经看见他们在河边玩耍。
He found his radio missing. 他发现他的收音机不见了。
I'll have my watch repaired. 我想把我的手表修一下。
【考点透视 考例精析】
[考点] 考查while表示“尽管…但是…”的意思。
[考例1] _________ model business is by no means easy to get into, the good model will always be in demand.
A．While B．Since C．As D．f
[解析] A本题的题意为“尽管模特行业根本不容易进入， 但好模特总是紧缺”。此处只有while可以表达这个意思。
[拓展] while除引导时间状语从句以外，还可以引导表示转折、对比的句子。
例如：
I am a worker, while he is a student. 我是个工人，而他是个学生。（while引导句子表转折）
While I have many visitors every day, the one I have been expecting hasn’t appeared yet. 尽管我每天都有很多来访者，我一直盼望的人至今还没有出现。 （while表示“尽管”的意思。）
[考点] 考查非谓语动词在具体语境中的理解。
[考例2] _________ such heavy pollution already, it may now be too late to clean up the river.
A．Having suffered B．Suffering C．To suffer D．Suffer
[解析] A非谓语动词在不同语境中，时态、含义都有不同。本句的含义为“河流已经遭受如此严重的污染，现在清理也许太迟了。”谓语动词的动作发生在having suffered之后，所以用的是动词-ing形式的完成式。
【基础演练】
一、根据所给首字母或括号中的汉语意思填写句子空格中所缺的单词。
1．It was extremely dangerous, but he m___________ to avoid the accident.
2．The idea of working for state-owned enterprises has little a_________ to young people nowadays.
3．You should have come to the party last night. What p_________ you from joining us?
4．You didn't really see it - it was just your i__________.
5．Let's d_________ ourselves into several groups.
6．Don’t say nonsense! I want a _________(具体的) answer.
7．The nation wants peace; only a _________(少数) want the war to continue.
8． ________(教育) is given to children by the government.
9．Can you tell me for what the church will use the money it gets from__________(收集，募捐)?
10．He held the boy _________(牢固地) in his arms and cried.
二、单项填空：
1．China Daily is _______ a newspaper, it can also help us to improve our English.
A．less than B．more than C．not more than D．no more than
2．__________ is very important.
A． Solve the problem B．How to solve the problem
C．How to be solved the problem D．What to deal with the problem
3．He didn’t move _________ the music went on, but got up _______ it ended.
A．when, while B．while, when C．while, while D．when, when
4．The athletes stood, _________ their national flag ____________.
A．seeing, raising B．watching, raising
C．looked at, rising D．seeing, rising
5．Jack spent as much time as he __________ over his lessons.
A. could going B. went C. could go D. would going
6．I meant ___________ you, but I was too busy.
A．to have called at B．calling on C．to call on D．to have called on
7. I am often told that too much work and too little rest often _______ illness.
A. leads to B. leads on C. leads into D. leads off
8．Every summer is the summit period(高峰期) during which university students ________ jobs, and the talents-exchange(人才交流) market will accordingly prosper(繁荣).
A. find B. hunt C. look for D. hunt for
9．Some passengers told the reporters about their ___________ in the burning train.
A. details B. trips C. events D. experiences
10．China’s genetic engineering(基因工程) industry __________ in the late 1980s, two decades after some other countries.
A. set off B. set in C. set to D. set back
【能力拓展】
完形填空：
I would like to suggest that for sixty to ninety minutes each evening all television broadcasting in the United states be forbidden by law.
Let us take a 1 , reasonable look at what the results might be if such a(an) 2 were accepted: families might use the time for a real family hour. Without the distraction of TV, they might 3 together after dinner and actually talk to one another. It is well known that many of our 4 --everything in fact, from the generation gap to the high divorce rate to some forms of 5 illness-are caused at least in part by 6 to communicate. By using the quiet family hour to 7 our problems, we might get to know each other better, and to like each other better.
On evening when such talk is 8 , families could discover more active pastimes(消遣，娱乐). Freed from TV, forced to find their own activities, they might take a 9 together to watch the sunset 10 they might take a walk together. 11 free time and no TV, children and adults might discover reading. There is more entertainment in 12 than in a TV program. 13 report that the generation growing up with television can hardly write an English sentence, 14 at the college level. 15 is often learned from reading. A more literate new generation could be a product of the quiet hour.
A different 16 of reading might also be done as it was in the past: reading aloud. The quiet hour could become the story hour. When the 17 ends, the TV net works might be forced to 18 with better shows in order to get us back from our newly discovered activities.
At first glance, this idea seems radical(激进的). How will we spend the time then? The fact is: it has been only twenty-five years 19 television came to control American free time. Those of us thirty-five and older can 20 childhoods without television. It wasn’t that difficult.
1． A．valuable B．pleasant C．quick D．serious
2． A．advice B．suggestion C．opinion D．offer
3． A．get around B．stand still C．meet D．sit around
4． A．problems B． trouble C．affairs D．misfortune
5． A． physical B．common C．mental D．familiar
6． A．attempt B．failure C．ability D．permission
7． A．discuss B．talk C．make sure D．see to
8． A．impossible B． unnecessary C．funny D．unpleasant
9． A．walk B． look C．ride D．rest
10． A．and B． or C．but D．while
11． A．At B． In C．For D．With
12． A．a fine poem B．a good book C．a quiet hour D．a composition
13． A．Professors B． Scientists C． Parents D．Educators
14． A．yet B．still C．even D．just
15． A．Writing B．Skill C．Speaking D．Listening
16． A．form B． kind C．method D．step
17． A．reading B．quiet hour C．activity D．program
18． A． come across B. come about C．come up D．broadcast
19． A．before B．since C．until D．after
20． A．remind B． remember C．recognize D．know
参考答案
高一部分
Units 21-22 (B1)
基础演练
一、1．managed 2．attraction 3．prevented 4．imagination 5．divide 6．specific
7．minority 8．Education 9．collections 10．firmly
二、1-5 BBBDA 6-10 DADDA
能力拓展
1-5 DBDAC 6-10 BABCB 11-15 DBDCA 16-20 ABCBB
1．D 作者在第一段提出了自己的建议。下面解释自己的理由。首先作者建议用认真理性的态度考虑这个建议被接受后的结果。根据reasonable的含义也可判断出。
2．B 从空白前的不定冠词可以排除advice。从文章第一句作者就表明自己要提出建议，因此选suggestion。
3．D 吃过饭，全家人坐在餐桌旁交流。
4．A 由many可以推断出该空应该填入可数名词，首先排除trouble，该空后的破折号是对空白处词的解释。
5．C 家庭缺少交流、理解而引起的往往是精神疾病。
6．B 根据上下文可以判断出答案。
7．A “discuss our problem”。家人坐在一起讨论问题，增进了解。
8．B 晚上家人聚会还可以找到新的消遣形式。
9．C 由下面的they might take a walk together可以排除A项。为了看日出，开车到某个地方是很可能的。
10．B 此题用or表示选择。
11．D with free time and no TV表示原因。
12．B 此题与前句是顺承关系。
13．D educator“教育者”。
14．C 教育者的研究显示：看电视长大的这一代人几乎不会写一个英语句子，甚至上了大学的人也不行。Even表示强调。
15．A 学生看电视过多，因此不会写句子。
16．A 朗读是读书的一种形式。
17．B 阅读的那种安静时间可以变成讲故事的时间，这时，电视网络系统就必须提供更好的节目以把人们再吸引回来。
18．C come up with “提出、提供”，不能用被动语态； come across：“偶遇”； come about：“发生，产生”； broadcast“广播，播放”，不与with连用。
19．B 主句用的是现在完成时，可以判断出该用since。
20．B 35岁及其以上的人还应该能记得没有电视的童年。
篇3：高一英语学案Units 15-16 (B1)(人教版高一英语教案教学设计)
【知识网络】
一、重点词汇与短语
1．recognize的用法小结：
（1）to know again (somebody or something ) that one has seen (or heard, etc) before 认出
I recognized Peter although I hadn't seen him for 10 years.
虽然我有没看到彼得了，但我认出了他。
I don't recognize this word -- what does it mean?
我不认识这个单词，它的意思是什么？
Many fail to recognize that all these things are in danger of denied.
许多人没有看到这一切正处于失去的危险之中。
（2）to accept as a fact; to admit承认；认可常用于以下结构：
recognize + object
recognize somebody to do something
recognize somebody as …
recognize + that从句
to recognize a new government
承认一个新政府
We all recognize him to be clever.
我们都承认他是非常聪明的。
We recognize that country as an independent state.
我们承认那个国家是一个独立的国家。
He didn’t recognize that he was wrong.
他不承认他错了。
（3）be prepared to admit or be aware of (something.); realize. 认清（某事）；认识到
He recognized his lack of qualifications/that he was not qualified for the post.
他认识到自己不够条件/没有资格担任那个职务。
2．marry的用法小结：表示“ 结婚；娶；嫁”的意思。
（1）marry为及物动词，宾语是somebody，不能加任何介词；而且是瞬时动词，不能与一段时间连用。
例如：
I am going to marry John. 我要和约翰结婚了。
（2）词组 somebody be married to somebody表示已婚的状态，这时可以与一段时间连用。例如：
Mary has been married to John for two years. 玛丽与约翰已结婚两年了。
（3）词组somebody get married to somebody表示的是瞬间的动作，不可与一段时间连用。
She got married to him last year. 她去年与他结婚了。
（4）词组 marry somebody to somebody: 使结婚；嫁（女）;把…嫁给…
He married his daughter to a businessman. 他把女儿嫁给了一个商人。
（5）主持…婚礼
The priest married them. 牧师主持他们的婚礼。
（6）“嫁给一个有钱人”可以有以下说法：
marry a man with a lot of money
marry a rich man
marry a fortune
marry well
3．worth的用法小结：
（1）后面跟表示“钱”的名词，意思是“值多少钱”。
例如：
How much is this bicycle worth? It's worth ￡50.
这辆自行车值多少钱？值50英磅。
（2）“值得…的”，可以用-doing这种主动形式表示被动的意义。
例如：
This book is worth reading. 这本书值得读。
This watch is worth repairing. 这只表值得修理。
（3）需要加强语气时，worth前可以用well，但不可以用very。
例如：
The film is very exciting. It is well worth seeing again.
这部电影很令人振奋。很值得再看一遍。
（4）it可以作be worth的形式主语。
It isn’t worth getting angry with him.
=He is not worth getting angry with.
犯不上跟他生气。
注意：（1）worthy后面要用“介词of + 动词-ing形式的被动式”或者“不定式的被动式”，表示“值得…的”。
例如：
This novel is worthy of being read a second time. = This novel is worthy to be read a second time. （这本小说值得再看一遍。）
（2）worthwhile也表示“值得…的”。要注意此结构：
It is worthwhile reading the novel a second time. ( 这本小说值得再读一遍 )
4．“祈使句 ＋ and /then /or /otherwise + 陈述句”结构的用法：
在此结构中，前两个起连接作用的词表示顺接关系，后两个表示逆接关系；前面的祈使句相当于一个条件状语从句，而陈述句表示结果；可以转换为带有条件状语从句的复合句；转换时要注意连接词的使用。
例如：
Work harder and/then you will succeed in your studies. （注意：此句中and和then只能用一个，不能一起使用。）
=If you work harder, you’ll succeed in your studies.
（如果你更加努力学习，在学习方面你就会成功。注意：and和then可以互换，只能用其中一个。）
Study hard, or/otherwise you’ll fail in your exams.
=If you don’t study hard, you’ll fail in your exams.
（如果你不刻苦学习，你就会考不及格。）
二、词义辨析
1．accept, receive与take的区别：
receive, accept, take这三个词都有“接受”的意思。
（1）receive表示被动地接受。
例如：
Then he smiled and told me I would receive an extra ￡100 a year!
后来他笑了，并且告诉我说，我将一年收到一百英镑的额外收入！
If you receive a request like this, you cannot fail to obey it!
如果你收到这样的一种请求，你不会不服从的！
A baby can only receive sense impressions, but it does not understand them.
婴儿只能接受感官方面的印象，而不能理解。
（2）accept总表示主动而且高兴地接受。
例如：
Please accept my apologies. 请接受我的歉意。
The villagers have told him that they will not accept the inn even if he gives it away.
村民们告诉他说，即使他把那小酒店白送给人家，也没有人会接受的。
She has received his present, but she will not accept it.
她收到了他的礼物，但她是不会接受的。
There is no accepted theory to explain the phenomenon.
没有公认的理论来解释这种现象。
（3）take所表示的接受包含着有人赠给的意思。
例如：
Did you take his advice? 你接受了他的建议了吗？
He takes anything he is given. 给他什么他就要什么。
（4）receive还表示“接待、接见”的意思。
例如：
The hotel is now open to receive guests. 这家旅馆现在开业接待客人了。
2．after all, above all, at all, in all
（1）after all: 置于句首时表示提醒对方注意，常翻译成“别忘了”；置于句末时表示“与预料的情况相反”。
例如：
Don’t be too strict with him. After all, he is only a child.
对他不要过于严格。别忘了，他还只是个孩子。
I thought I would fail in the last exam, but I passed, after all.
我原以为上次考试我会不及格，但是没有想到我竟然及格了。
（2）above all: 首先，重要的是。
例如：
Above all, I love taking a walk every evening.
首先，我喜欢每天晚上散步。
（3）at all:常用于否定句和疑问句，表示加强语气。常翻译成：“根本、丝毫”等。
例如：
I'm not at all sorry I came, I'm glad! 我来了一点也不遗憾，我很高兴。
There was nothing at all to eat. 根本就没有什么东西吃。
Are you at all worried about the forecast? 你对这项预报不担一点心吗？
（4）in all: 意思是“总计”。
例如：
There were twelve of us in all for dinner. 我们一共12人吃饭。
三、重点句型
1．I’d rather not tell you.
注意：somebody would rather do something表示“某人宁愿做某事”；它的否定句表示“某人还是别…”。
例如：
I would rather go there by bus. (我宁愿坐公共汽车去那里。)
I would rather not sit there doing nothing. (我不愿坐在那里什么都不做。)
2．on’t touch anything, unless your teacher tells you to.
unless引导的从句有时可以和if引导的否定条件句互换，此句可以改成：…, if your teacher doesn’t tell you to. 另外要注意句末的to后省略了touch something。
再如：
I won’t go with you unless you tell me who will be with us.
如果你不告诉我谁将和我们一起，我就不会和你一起去。
3．here’s no doubt that 100 years ago animal testing was cruel but today animals in experiments are very well taken of.
此句中There’s no doubt that…为固定句型，意思是“毫无疑问”。
再如：
There is no doubt that he is our model in work. 毫无疑问，他是我们工作中的模范。
四、语法复习
情态动词must, can/could, may/might表示推测、猜测、可能的用法。
1．表示对所发生的事情或情景作出“很肯定”的推测时，肯定式用must，否定式用can’t，意思是“一定，想必；不可能”。
例如：
The new term has just started. She must be very busy preparing her lessons.
新的学期刚刚开始。她现在一定是忙于备课。
They can’t be at home now. It is now 10 o’clock. They must be in the office.
他们现在不可能在家。现在是10点钟。他们一定在办公室。
2．表示对当前发生的事或者情况作出较有可能的推测时用can，相当于“可能是、也许会、会”。
例如：
It can be true.
这可能是真的。
Watching TV for a long time can damage your eyes.
看电视的时间长有可能损伤你的视力。
3．表示对当前发生的事或者情况作出“不太肯定”的推测时，用may/might/could，相当于“也许、有可能”。Might和could不是表示过去，它们和may一样，都表示“现在的推测”，但是语气较委婉，或者表示可能性更小一些。
例如：
George hasn’t come yet. He may/might/could busy today.
乔治还没有来。他今天可能忙。
I can’t see clearly. There may/might/could a person in the darkness.
我看不清楚。黑暗中可能有个人。
【考点透视 考例精析】
[考点] 考查情态动词can的用法。
[考例1] How ______ you say that you really understand the whole story if you have covered only part of the article? （上海，29）
A．can B．must C．need D．may
[解析] A can用于疑问句或否定句中表示惊异、不相信等，意思是“可能、能够”。在此句中，can表示惊异的感情色彩。
[拓展] “can”表达一定的感情色彩的句子在口语中是很常见的。
再如：
How can you say that? After all, you are a student now, and you should study hard.
你怎么能够那么说？别忘了，你现在是个学生，你应该努力学习。
[考点] 考查表“发生”的词组的用法区别。
[考例2] An accident ___________ in the street. ____________ happened to me that I was on the spot.
A．took place, It B．happened, That C．happened, It D．broke out, That
[解析] C 本句牵扯到表示“发生”意义的词组的区别。Take place表示“必然、自然地发生”；happen表示“意外发生”；break out表示“（火、战争、瘟疫等）爆发”。从第二个句子的结构来看，that引导的从句为真正的主语，前面用形式宾语it来代替。所以选择答案C。
[考点] 本题考查推测结构的否定用法。
[考例3] –I heard they went skiing in the mountains last winter.（NMET北京，31）
--It ________ true because there was little snow there.
A．may not be B．won’t be C．couldn’t be D．mustn’t be
[解析] C couldn’t be true表示“这件事不可能是真的”。“There was little snow”说明了原因。
[考点] 本题考查否定转移时反意疑问句的用法。
[考例4] Maybe you’ve made a mistake. I don’t think he knows you, _________?
A．don’t you B．do I C．does he D．doesn’t he
[解析] C I/we don’t think后面跟宾语从句时，出现了“否定转移”现象，其反意疑问句应该根据从句来变。
【基础演练】
一、根据所给首字母或括号中的汉语意思填写句子空格中所缺的单词。
1．They c_______ you $20 just to get in the night club.
2．The operation p_______ a complete success.
3．The work is so important that you must be careful enough not to make any mistake. Even a small one may c______ you your job.
4．All schools are under the c_______ of the Ministry of Education.
5．He earned 200,000 dollars in only one month. Of course he was a s____________ businessman.
6．Sometimes a few words of c_____ to the one who has just failed may encourage him to stand up.
7．This new model is of high _________ （质量）and is not expensive either.
8．According to the weather report, the weather will ________（继续） fine till this weekend.
9．At the end of an hour's play the ________（优势） lay definitely with him.
10．I am ________（肯定） that I gave you his address.
二、单项填空：
1．Let’s keep to the point or we _______any decisions. (NMET I)
A． will never reach B．have never reached
C．never reach D．never reached
2．–Isn’t that Ann’s husomebodyand over there? (NMET 2004 I)
--No, it __________ be him. I’m sure he doesn’t wear glassed.
A．can’t B．must not C．won’t D．may not
3．The mayor of Beijing says that all construction work for the Beijing Olympics ________ by . (北京卷 2004)
A．has been completed B．has completed
C．will have been completed D．will have completed
4．–Who’s that speaking?
--Mathilde Loisel.
--Mathilde! Oh, yes. Sorry. I __________ your voice.
A．didn’t know B．don’t know C．didn’t recognize D．don’t recognize
5．Of all the books on the desk，________ is of any use for our study. [06 四川卷]
A．nothing B．no one C．neither D．none
6．Listen! There’s a lot of noise from next door. They _________ a party.
A．could have had B．must be having C．should have had D．can be having
7．“Put that away _________ it’s broken.” Mum said angrily when Johnny played with the precious vase.
A．unless B．before C．once D．until
8．______ in 1636, Harvard is one of the most famous universities in the United States.
A．Founded B．Founding C．Being founded D．It was founded
9．The police tried to find the _______ child. But without ________ luck, they didn’t find him.
A．lost, a B．missing, / C．losing, a D．missing, /
10．It started _______ and I was beginning _______ how important his decision was that I should take an umbrella.
A．to rain, to realize B．raining, realizing
C．raining, to realize D．to rain, realizing
【能力拓展】
完形填空：
George Pickens had been making a wish daily as a worker at Central Bank.
All over the country banks were being （1） . George thought, （2） this bank? Didn’t robbers hear of its four-million-dollar （3） ? Were they afraid of Mr. Ackerman, the old （4） guard, who hadn’t （5） his gun in twenty-two years?
Of course George had a(an) （6） for wanting the bank to be robbed. （7） , he couldn’t simply take bills that were under his （8） all day long. So he had thought of another （9） to get them. His plan was （10） . It went like this:
If Bank Robber A holds up Bank Teller B…
And if Bank Teller B gives Bank Robber A a certain sum of money…
What is to prevent Bank Teller B from （11） all the money left and （12） that it was taken away by Bank Robber A?
There were only one （13） . Where was Bank Robber A?
One morning George entered the bank. “Good morning, Mr Burrows,” he said （14） . The bank president said something in a （15） voice to George and went into his office.
At two o’clock Bank Robber A walked in. George （16） he was a bank robber. For one thing, he stole in. For another thing, he wore a mask(面罩).
“This is a holdup,” the man said （17） . He took a gun from his pocket. The （18） made a small sound. “You!” the bank robber said, “Lie down on the floor!” Mr Ackerman lay down. The robber stepped （19） to George’s cage.
“All right,” he said. “Hand it over.”
“Yes, sir,” George reached into his drawer and took all the bills from the top part close to six thousand dollars. He passed them through the window. The robber took them, put them into his pocket, and （20） to leave.
Then, while everyone watched Bank Robber A, Bank Teller B calmly lifted off the top part of the drawer and got the bills from the bottom part into his pockets.
1． A．repaired B．broken C．robbed D．built
2． A．Why not B．What about C．How about D．How is
3． A．money B．capital C．note D．bill
4． A．door B．body C．safety D．bank
5． A. pulled out B．got C．carried out D．kept
6． A. chance B．eason C．excuse D．time
7． A．Of all B．In all C．Above all D．After all
8． A．hands B．desks C．drawer D．control
9． A．man B．day C．way D．robber
10． A． perfect B．complete C．easy D．simple
11． A．robbing B．stealing C．keeping D．taking
12． A．telling B．thinking C．insisting D．imagining
13． A．secret B．problem C．thing D．puzzle
14．A．cheerfully B．calmly C．anxiously D．eagerly
15． A．loud B．low C．big D．worrying
16． A．trusted B．recognized C．supposed D．knew
17． A．angrily B．roughly C．firmly D．politely
18． A．robber B．manager C．guard D．customer
19． A．on B．above C．through D．over
20． A．turned B．decided C．signed D．drew
参考答案
高一部分
Units 15-16 (B1)
基础演练
一、1．charged 2．proved 3．cost 4．control 5．successful 6．comfort 7．quality 8．continue 9．advantage 10．positive
二、1-5 AACCA 6-10 BBABA
能力拓展
参考答案与解析：
1-5 CABDD 6-10 BDACD 11-15 CCBAB 16-20 DBCDA
1．C 从全文看来，整篇围绕着抢银行而展开， A. repair修理；B. “破坏”；D. build，建立，均不合题意。
2．A George作为Central Bank的一个员工，所惊奇的是在全国的银行都被抢劫时，为什么独独他所在的银行没有被抢。
3．B capital “资本，资金”，与题意相符。
4．D 在银行，明显为 bank guard，与前文一直提到的rob相照应。
5．A pull out “掏出，拔掉”。这家银行没有被抢劫，难道是因为他们害怕这个二十年没有掏出枪的老保安？
6．B reason 原因；上文说George想让银行被抢，下文便介绍他这种想法出现的原因。
7．D after all “毕竟”； B. in all 总计；C. above all “首先”。George 想得到所有的钱，显然是不可能的，表示退一步来说的，只有选择D。
8．A under one’s hand “在某人指示下，受某人支配、掌握”。
8．C 靠正常工资难以满足George，所以他想到另一条获得大钱的方法。所以是another way。
10．D 从后面的意思看，他的计划应该是“simple”。
11．C “keep something + done”“使…处于某种情况下”。
12．C insist“坚持”，表示强调。
13． B “万事俱备，只欠东风”。George所考虑的步骤有一个仅有的“问题”，即“Where was Bank Robber A?”
14．A cheerfully “欢悦地，高兴地”，与George当时的心情相配，他考虑了整个计划，想着马上就能实现多钱的梦想，自然高兴异常。
15．B in a low voice“以极低的声音”。
16．D 从下文，那个人破门而入，并戴着面罩，他“知道”是个robber，是断定。
17．B roughly“粗鲁地，粗暴地”，正符合robber的身份，符合语言环境。
18．C 显然与robber相对的，guard的作用突显出来。
19．D step over to 表示动作的趋向。
20．A turn to “转身”。Robber抢了钱，肯定是转身离开，扬长而去。
篇4：高一英语学案Units 11-12 (B1)(人教版高一英语教案教学设计)
【知识网络】
一、重点词汇与短语
1． express的用法小结：
（1）express主要作为及物动词使用，意思是“表达；表示”。
例如：
He can express himself in good clear English now after four years' hard learning.
经过四年的艰苦学习,现在他能用清楚流畅的英语表达自己的意思了。
Her face expressed great joy when Mrs White knew that her son had been admitted to Harvad.
怀特夫人听说自己的儿子被哈佛大学录取了,脸上显出非常高兴的样子。“
（2）express的常用短语：
express one’s thanks：表示谢意
express oneself：表达自己的意思
express one’s sadness：表达某人的悲伤
express one’s opinion：表达某人的观点
express one’s thoughts: 表达某人的想法
（3）express 的名词形式为expression。
2．with复合结构小结：
“with + 介词短语/名词/代词/现在分词/过去分词/不定式/副词/形容词等等”构成with复合结构，在句中作定语、状语等等。
例如：
With a book in his hand, he left the room.
手里拿着一本书，他离开了房间。
With so much homework to do, I don’t have any time to play computer games.
有那么多的作业要做， 我一点玩电脑游戏的时间都没有。
With the robber caught, we were able to get a night’s sleep at last.
随着强盗被抓获，我们终于能够睡一晚上的好觉了。
3．turn 构成的词组小结：
turn … over: 把…翻过来
turn to: 转到，翻到
turn against: 背叛
turn away: 把…打发走
turn on: 开
turn off: 关
turn up: 开大
turn down: 调低，关小
turn in: 交出，上交
turn into: 把…变成…
4．desire：的用法小结：
（1）desire用做名词，意思是“渴望；希望；强烈的欲望”。
例如：
He has no desire for being famous. 他对出名没有什么欲望。
I had a desire to go swimming. 我很想去游泳。
He works hard from a desire to become rich.
他因为渴望致富而努力工作。
（2）desire作为动词，表示“渴望，愿望”的意思。有三种常用结构：
desire to do something
desire somebody to do something
desire that + 虚拟语气从句
例如：
I desire to go to San Francisco next month. 我非常渴望下个月去旧金山。
What do you desire me to do next? 下一步你想让我做什么？
I desire that you (should) complete your homework on time next time.
我希望你下一次按时完成作业。
（3）desire作为动词，还可以表示“请求”，为官方用语。
例如：
It is desired that this rule shall be brought to the attention of the staff.
要求全体工作人员注意本条规章制度。
二、词义辨析
1．if only 与only if的区别：
only if表示”只有“，为if的强调形式；if only则表示”如果……就好了“用于虚拟语气，有时也可用于陈述语气。 例如：
I wake up only if the school bell rings .
只有学校的钟响了，我才会醒。
If only I had a million dollars.
我如果有一百万美圆就好了。
If only he comes back early.
但愿他早点回来。
2．by， with与 in表示工具或者手段时的区别：
（1）by表示“以…的方式”，表示利用某种手段或者通过某种方式，相当于“by means of”，后面通常跟名词原形或者动词-ing形式。
例如：
She earned money by writing. 她靠写作挣钱。
We went by air. 我们乘飞机走。
All the work had to be done by hand. 所有的工作都不得不用手工来完成。
（2）with表示使用有形的工具或者器官，其后的名词前一般用冠词。
例如：
I pity the orphans with all my heart. 我完全同情这些孤儿。
Many people like eating with a spoon. 很多人喜欢用勺子吃饭。
We always write with pens. 我们通常用笔写字。
He opened the door with his key. 他用钥匙开了门。
Simon filled the bucket with water. 西蒙把桶里装满了水。
（3）in 表示使用某种语言或者用墨水、颜色、颜料等原料或者材料，名词前也不用冠词。
例如：
The teacher require us to write in ink. 老师要求我们用墨水写字。
We are required to speak in English in his class. 要求我们在他的课上用英语讲话。
It is impolite to write a letter in red ink. 用红墨水写信是不礼貌的。
3．power, strength 与force的区别：
（1）power含义最广，指政治力量或能力。
例如：
Some animals have the power to see in the dark.
有些动物具有在黑暗中能看见东西的本领。
His powers are failing. 他的体力在衰退。
Power should be used wisely. 应明智运用权力。
（2）strength指某人或者某物所具有的内在力量，可以指体力、力气。
例如：
I haven't the strength to lift this table. 我没有力气抬这张桌子。
The boy gathered his strength to stand up. 那个男孩聚集力量站了起来。
3）force也可以指物质或者精神力量，多指为做某事而使用的力量，也可以指武力。
例如：
the force of the explosion：爆炸力
You must use force to open that bottle. 你必须用力打开那个瓶子。
The thief took the money from the old man by force. 小偷用暴力夺走了老人的钱。
the forces of evil：邪恶势力
三、重点句型
1．People have been playing the blues for many years, but the music has kept many of its characteristics.
本句是一个并列句，第一个分句用的是现在完成进行时，强调动作的持续进行；第二个分句用的是现在完成时，表示现在的结果。在使用时要注意这两个时态表示的重点。
2．Pop music makes people feel easy and forget about the real world; rock music makes people think about the world and how to make their life better.
这两个并列的分句都使用了动词make引导复合宾语结构，宾语补足语都是省略了to的动词不定式。
3．It’s a world of magic and wonders, a world where anything can happen.
此句中的where引导一个定语从句。Where引导定语从句与where引导地点状语从句的标记就是其前面有没有一个表示地点的名词。有名词的，往往是定语从句，没有名词的，往往是一个地点状语从句。
例如：
They reached a place where there were many trees and flowers. （where引导定语从句）
They were sent where they wanted to go. (where引导地点状语从句)
【考点透视 考例精析】
[考点] 考查引导主语从句、表语从句的连接词的用法。
[考例1] _________ she couldn’t understand was _________ fewer and fewer students showed interest in her lesson.
A．What, why B．What, that C．That, why D．That, that
[解析] A 本句的主语从句缺少主语，that不能引导主语从句并同时作主语，所以只能选what；第二个空缺表语从句的连接词，根据句子的意思，应该是一个表示原因的连接词，所以就是why。
[拓展] 引导主语从句时，that不做成分，但是还不能省略，这是一个值得注意的问题。因为that在引导定语从句作宾语及其它从句中是可以省略的；而that引导表语从句时也不做成分。
再如：
That he is a good official is known throughout the country. （that引导主语从句，不做成分）
The reason why he was late was that he had an unexpected visitor. (why引导定语从句；that引导一个表语从句。
[考点] 并列连词or的用法。
[考例2] Start out right away, ________ you'll miss the first train. [06 四川卷]
A．and B．but C．or D．while
[解析] C 解析：并列连词or表达的意义是 “否则, 要不然”。
[考点] 考查at表示一个时间点的用法。
[考例3] Don’t call between 12 o’clock and 13 o’clock, _____________ I am usually having lunch.
A．at which B．at which time C． by which D．by which time
[解析] B 本题中的which引导一个定语从句，先行词为between 12 o’clock and 13 o’clock， at表示在12点和13点之间的某个时间，其表示的是一个“时间点”，所以选B。
[拓展] 英语中表示时间的介词大多是固定的，比如：in the morning/in the afternoon/in the evening, at noon/at night/at midnight, on the morning of next Wednesday/on the afternoon of last Monday, on August 16th等等。
【基础演练】
一、根据所给首字母或括号中的汉语意思填写句子空格中所缺的单词。
1．The actors who p__________ the play at the theatre were all students from our university.
2．I wasn't s_____________ with our treatment at that hotel, so I shall complain to the manager.
3．The two girls were w_____________ in order not to be heard by others.
4． Si Guangnan was a very famous Chinese ___________ and he wrote many famous songs that were popular in the 1980s.
5． All of them felt _________ when they lost the game which they could win.
6．He made the ________ （建议）that we go there at seven tomorrow morning.
7．There are also people who come to take such courses as Chinese _____(传统的) medicine, painting, etc.
8．As a middle school teacher, he has no___________(愿望)for wealth.
9．They are coming to the _________( 展览会) as my guests.
10．He waited for the _______________(宣布)of the result of the competition with bated breath.
二、单项填空：
1．Look at the trouble I am in! If only I _________ your advice.
A．followed B． would followed
C．had followed D．should follow
2．Today’s American music culture mostly ________ many different styles borrowed from other countries.
A．contained B．contains C．including D．included
3．We do think that it ______________ whether you love the performance or not.
A．makes no difference B．makes great difference
C．makes it different D．makes it differently
4．She _______ to have a rest and her motorbike _______ at the same time.
A．needs, needs to be repaired B．need, needs to repair
C．need, needs repairing D．needed, needs to be repaired
5．Mr. Johnson is looking for another job because he feels that nothing he does _________ his boss.
A．serves B．satisfies C．promises D．supports
6．While working in the countryside, the students ________ a great deal of knowledge on plant life.
A．looked up B．picked up C．put up D．called up
7．She was afraid _______ the big glass vase because she is afraid __________ it.
A．to carry, of breaking B． of carrying, to break
C．of carrying, of breaking D．for carrying, to break
8．I ________ shopping when a friend of mine came to see me.
A．am going B．has gone C．went D．was about to go
9．The woman takes good care of me as if I ____________ her own daughter.
A．am B．had been C．have been D．were
10．You can call me _________ you like. I will always be available to see you.
A．whoever B．whatever C．wherever D．whenever
【能力拓展】
完形填空：
Christmas was a wonderful time in Brooklyn. But holiday was in the air long before it came. The first sure (1) of it was the windows of the stores. You have to be a child to know the wonder of a store (2) filled with dolls, sleds and other playthings. And this wonder was (3) for a girl named Fancy. How (4) it was for Fancy to walk down the street and see another store all (5) for Christmas!
The clean (6) window was filled with cotton to look like snow. On this cotton snow (7) with dolls, dolls with golden hair, and other dolls which Fancy liked (8) better, their hair with the (9) of rich coffee with lots of milk in it, owned the deep blue eyes that (10) straight into a little girl’s heart. Fancy had never had such a doll. Her doll was a little (11) that cost only 5 cents.
Then there were the sleds for (12) across the snow. One sled had a flower (13) on it, a deep blue flower with bright green (14) . The sleds had wonderful (15) painted on them too, Rose Board, Megnolya, Snow King, the Flier and so on. Fancy thought,“ (16) I could only have one of those, I would never ask god for another thing (17) I live.” There were other beautiful toys in the store windows. And Fancy (18) weak from looking at so many wonderful things and thinking about them so hard. A week before Christmas, evergreen trees (19) in Fancy’s part of Brooklyn, Christmas tree sellers (20) ropes along the street. They put the green trees against the ropes and sold them to people who want to buy.
1． A．signal B．sign C．wonder D．mark
2． A． window B．living-room C．house D．store
3． A．expensive B．cheap C．free D．strange
4． A．exciting B． disappointing C．moving D．inspiring
5． A. good B．eager C．busy D．ready
6． A.shining B．recycling C．cleaning D．reflecting
7． A．boxes were filled B．were boxes filled
C．boxes were covered D．were boxes covered
8． A．fairly B．little C．ever D．even
9． A．factor B．kind C．color D．smell
10．A．focused B．went C．looked D．fell
11．A．girl B．one C．eye D．cotton
12．A．walking B．coming C．boating D．sliding
13．A．painted B．stuck C．tied D．pinned
14．A．fruit B．branches C．leaves D．grass
15．A．names B．flowers C． boxes D．dolls
16．A．until B．if C．unless D．before
17．A．as good as B．as far as C．as well as D．as long as
18．A． got B．felt C．became D．turned
19．A．stopped arriving B．began arriving C．died out D．grew up
20．A．kept B．cut C．tied D．broke
参考答案
高一部分
Units 11-12 (B1)
基础演练
一、1. performed 2. satisfied 3. whispering 4. musician 5. unhappy 6. suggestion 7. traditional 8. desire 9. exhibition 10. announcement
二、1-5 CBAAB 6-10 BADDD
能力拓展
1-5 BACAD 6-10 ABDCC 11-15 BDACA 16-20 BDBBC
1． B．圣诞节到来的第一可靠的标志（sign）是商店的窗户。
3． C．这个奇迹就是（橱窗里这些洋娃娃和其他的玩具）对小女孩Fancy是免费的（free）。
9． C．这些洋娃娃的头发的颜色（color）是深咖啡色参合有浓浓的牛奶色。
10．C．那双深蓝色的眼睛直接看透（look straight into）了小女孩的心思。
12．D．然后那些雪橇（sleds）在雪上滑行（sliding）。
13．A．结构have sth. done;它上面画（painted）有一朵花。
16．B．Fancy心里想如果（if）我仅有一个这样的雪橇，我一辈子（as long as I live）决不再要别的什么玩具。
18．B．Fancy因为一直在看那么多的精彩物品和苦苦的想着它们而感到（felt）虚弱。
19．B．圣诞节之前一个星期，常青树就开始出现在（began arriving）Fancy居住的Brooklyn街区，即有人开始卖买常青树了。
篇5：高一英语学案Units 13-14 (B1)(人教版高一英语教案教学设计)
【知识网络】
一、重点词汇与短语
1．way: 在表示“方式，方法”的意思时，要注意其搭配：
way of doing something
way (for somebody) to do something
in this way=by this means
by the way：顺便说说；顺便提起
way of life：生活方式
to my way of thinking：依我看来
Some women like the older ways of doing things.
有些女性喜欢处理事务的老办法。
Can you suggest a good way for us to ask people to send us the money, and let us buy the gift when we get to the mainland?
您能不能给我们建议一个好办法,让我们请大家送钱给我们,然后让我们在回到大陆时再购买礼物?
Stress is a natural part of everyday life and there is no way to avoid it.
压力是日常生活中不可分割的一部分,无法逃避。
In this way, Americans 'send their climates' to people in other states.
这样美国人把'本地的气候'传送给其它州的人。
In this way, he has begun his own private 'telephone' service.
就这样,他开始了自己的私人'电话'业务。
Each successful manager has a way of his own in bringing his views to bear.
每一个成功的经理都有他自己独特的方式使别人接受他的意见。
By the way, what happened to the money?
顺便问一句，那笔钱后来怎么样了？
2．likely可以用作形容词，意思是“ 预期的，可能的”。常用于下列句型：
It is likely that somebody does/do something
Somebody is/are likely to do something
It is very likely that she will ring me tonight.
今晚她很可能给我打电话。
She is very likely to ring me tonight.
It isn’t likely to rain tomorrow.
明天不大可能下雨。
Note: 许多同学认为以-ly结尾的是副词，其实这是一个误区。如果一个形容词后加-ly，那么常常是一个副词，但是如果在名词后加上-ly，那往往是一个形容词。
例如：
lovely, friendly, manly, comradely 等都是名词加上-ly后变成的形容词。
那个骗子擅长骗人。
3．examine的用法小结：
（1）examine 作及物动词，意思是“检查；细看”。例如：
All the machines will be examined.
所有机器都将检查一遍。
”Yesterday the firemen examined the ground carefully, but were not able to find any broken glass.“
”昨天,消防队员们仔细地检查了地面,但未能找到任何碎玻璃。“
（2）examine还有“对…进行考试”的意思，此时常在表示测试科目名词前加介词in或on。
例如：
He examined the boys in English.
他考孩子们的英语。
The teacher will examine the class on everything they have learnt this year.
教师要考学生今年学过的所有知识。
（3）examine还可以表示“询问；查问；对…进行审查”。例如：
He was examined by the police.
他被警察查问。
（4）同义词：test vt. 测试 quiz：n. 测验
二、词义辨析
1．for example, for instance, such as, like
（1）for example用来举例说明。为句中插入语，其前后需用逗号隔开。它可用于句首、句中或句末。
Fox example, liquid has no definite shape.
例如，液体没有固定的形状。
Noise, for example, is a kind of pollution.
例如，噪音是一种污染。
Many great men have risen from poverty-Lincoln and Edison, for example.
许多伟人是从贫困中崛起的-比如林肯和爱迪生。
（2）such as用来列举同类人或事物中的几个例子。such as后切不可用逗号，
如：
Some of the European languages come from Latin, such as French, Italian and Spanish.
有些欧洲语言来源于拉丁语，例如法语、意大利语和西班牙语。
Note: 使用such as来举例子，只能举其中一部分，不能全部举出。若全部举出，要改用namely或者that is to say(意为：即)。
如：
He knows four languages, namely(=that is to say) Chinese, English, Russian and French.
他精通四门语言，即汉语、英语、俄语和法语。
（3）like也常用来举例，可与such as互换。
如：
Some cold-blooded animals, like(=such as) the cat, the dog or the wolf, do not need to hibernate.
such as 用于举例时可以分开使用，这是不能与like互换。
Such people as you described just now are very common these days.
像你刚才描述的那种人这些日子很常见。
（4）for instance经常与for example互换。
如：
There are occupations (which are) more dangerous than truck driving; for instance (for example), training tigers. 比开卡车危险的职业还是有的，比如说驯老虎。
2．opportunity ，occasion与chance的区别：
opportunity, occasion, chance这组词的一般含义是“时机”或“机会”。不管在口语中或者在文学作品中，这几个都是常用的词。
（1）opportunity表示某时机符合自己想干某事的意愿、目的、雄心甚至野心。常与动词have, get, find, create, take, miss等连用。
例如：
They are waiting for an opportunity to take action：他们正在伺机而动
to avail oneself of the opportunity to say a few words：借此机会说几句话
I took the opportunity of visiting my aunt while I was in Shanghai.
我利用在上海的机会探望了我的姑姑。
Perhaps there is an element of truth in both these pictures, but few of us have had the opportunity to find out.
或许这两种想象中都有一定的真实成分，但是我们中很少有人有机会去发现它。
（2）occasion含有opportunity所能表达的这样一层意思：某时机能激发或唤起某人的某种行为，
如：
在“必要时”一语中便包含着激发某行为的时刻，此语可译为When occasion demands…；“这不是哭泣的时候。”这句话可译为It's no occasion for crying。在to have no occasion to do…固定词组中，occasion之所以能够引申为reason或cause的含义，也是与occasion的上述基本词义有关的。
再如：
This sort of thing is usual on occasions like this. 这类事情在这种场合是常见的。
This is not an occasion for laughter.
这不是笑的时候。（指不适合于笑，或不是笑的场合。）
（3）chance表示幸运或偶然的时机，还可以指可能性的程度。
例如：
What are your chances of being promoted?你升职的可能性有多大？
N o one discovers a rarity by chance. 侥幸发现一件珍品的人是没有的。
三、重点句型
1．-What’s the matter?
-I’ve got a pain here.
询问某人身体如何，除了用以上的表达方式，还可以用“What’s wrong with you?”。其中，wrong是形容词，而例句中的the matter为名词。在口语中都是很常用的。
例如：
--What’s wrong with you? （你怎么了？）
--I’ve had a bad headache ever since this morning. (自从今天早晨我的头就很痛。)
2．A healthy diet should include a variety of food, most of which should be rich in nutrients.
此句中的most of which引导非限定性定语从句，这是考试中常考的一类题目。
再如：
There are all kinds of trees in the forest, most of which are tall ones.
There are all kinds of trees in the forest, and most of them are tall ones.
森林里有各种各样的树木，它们中大部分是很高的树。
以上两句的意思基本相同，但是要注意：第一句是most of which引导非限制性定语从句，而第二句为and引导的并列句。做题时，关键要分析句子的结构，尤其是有关连词的问题。
3．Only in that way will we be ready for the challenges and opportunities in life.
only置于句首而且修饰状语时，句子用倒装语序；但是，如果only在句首修饰主语，那就用陈述语序。
例如：
Only people with tickets can go into the cinema. 只有那些有票的人才可以进电影院。
Only by the end of last month had they finished the difficult task.
只是到了上个月的月底他们才完成了那项困难的任务。
四、语法复习
情态动词had better, should, ought to,常被用来表示：义务、责任和规劝。
1．had better(提示：无人称的变化，不可用has/have替换它们；不用于第一人称。)意思是“最好”，后面跟动词原形，即had better do something；否定式是had better not do something。
如：
You’d better wait outside.
你最好在外面等着。
You’d better not stand in the street. There comes a car.
你最好别站在街上。来车了。
2．should用作情态动词时，各种人称单、复数通用。主要用法有：
（1）表示“义务、责任”，译为“应该”，
例如：
You should tell the students to respect their parents. 你应该告诉学生尊敬父母。
This is an important point that we should remember. 这是我们应该记住的要点。
（2）表示“可能性、推测或理论”，常翻译成汉语的“可能…，该…”。
例如：
They should be there by tomorrow, I think. 我想他们明天该到那儿。
It’s already three o’clock, the football game should begin soon.
已经三点钟了，足球比赛不久就该开始了。
（3）说话人在提出意见、建议、请求时，可用should表示委婉、谦逊的语气，有时相当于“可、倒是；想”等。
例如：
I should say it would be better to ask him about it again.
关于这件事我看最好再问他一下。（提出意见）
I should think so. 我也是这么想的。
（4）表“吃惊”。
例如：
I’m surprised that you should have been late.
你居然迟到了，真让我吃惊。
We are surprised that they should have been fooled by such a simple trick.
他们竟然被这么个简单的诡计所愚弄，真让我们吃惊。
3．ought to
ought to无人称和时态变化，只有ought to一种形式，后面跟动词原形，表示“有义务或责任”做某事，语气比should强，表示客观上应该做某事，也可表示“劝告”。否定式为ought not to
如：
You ought to obey your parents.
你应该听父母的话。
I knew that I ought not to tell him about it, so I didn’t.我知道我不该告诉他这件事，所以我没有告诉他。
Note：“should(ought to)+不定式一般式”用来谈论现在和将来“应该…”，若谈论过去“应该…”要用should(ought to)+不定式的完成式，即should/ought to have done。其否定式表示“过去不应做但做了”。
例如：
I should/ought to have done such a thing.
我本应该做这件事的。(却没有做)
You should not/ought not to have gone back to work without the doctor’s permission.
你不应该未经医生许可就去工作。（你却回去工作了）
【考点透视 考例精析】
[考点] 考查情态动词的用法区别。
[考例1] According to the local regulations, anyone who intends to get a driver’s licence ______ take an eye test. (NMET春季上海，29)
A．can B．must C．would D．may
[解析] B must根据句意，此处意思是“必须”，要获得驾驶执照必须进行视力测试。can为“能够”；would为“愿意”；may为“可以”。
[考点] 考查情态动词的意义区别。
[考例2] I often see lights in that empty house. Do you think I ________ report it to the police? (NMET全国卷I, 21)
A．should B．may C．will D．can
[解析] A should表示“应该”。因为经常看见那座空房子里有灯光，所以征求对方的意见是否应该向警察报告。
[考点] 考查“should + have + done”的用法。
[考例3] Mr. White ______ at 8:30 for the meeting, but he didn’t turn up. (NMET全国卷，27)
A．should have arrived B．should arrive
C．should have had arrived D．should be arriving
[解析] A 此句所使用的是“should + have + 过去分词”结构表示本来应该做却没有做的事情。所提供的场景是but he didn’t turn up，说明他本来应该8：30来开会，但没有来。再如：
You should have done your homework by yourself.
你本来该独立完成作业。
【基础演练】
一、根据所给首字母或括号中的汉语意思填写句子空格中所缺的单词。
1．Young people usually have more ______(精力) than the old.
2．You have to _______（权衡） the advantages of living downtown against the disadvantages.
3．This drink is a m_______ of three different sorts.
4．A c________ change takes place in any substance when it burns.
5．The ________(作用) of an adjective is to describe or add to the meaning of a noun.
6．The Olympic Games begin with a _______（行进） of all the competing nations.
7．Two parties may have _______(冲突) of ideas or goals.
8．An a________ is a disagreement or problem between two people in which they use words to fight.
9． c________ college teaches things that would be useful in business.
10．Usually people don't _______(尊敬) those who are too compliant.
二、单项填空：
1．On a cold winter night, I ______ spend an evening watching TV.
A．have to can B．have to be able C．have be able to D．have to be able to
2．”May I sit here?“ ”No, you _______.“
A．must B．had better C．mustn't D．needn't
3． --”Why is he late?“
--”He _____ the bus.“
A．must miss B．had to miss
C．should have missed D．must have missed
4．We didn't see him at the lecture yesterday. He ______ it.
A．mustn't attend B．can't have attended
C．would have not attend D．needed have attended
5．The policeman told the pupil, ”You _____ play football in the street.“
A．mustn't B．needn't C．can't D．shouldn't
6．--”What has happened to Peter?“
--”I don't know. He _____ lost.“
A．can't have got B．might have got C．might get D．can got
7．You _____ allowed the child to go alone.
A．mustn't have B．had not have to C．ought not to D．ought not to have
8．He says you ______ have his bike if you don't take good care of it.
A． shan't B．won't C．mustn't D．needn't
9．--”Are you still going to England for your holiday?“
--”Yes, but I really _____ because I don't have much money.“
A． can't B．won't C．shouldn't D．mustn't
10．–I’ll tell Mary about her new job tomorrow.
--You ______her last week. (NMET 20福建，32)
A．ought to tell B． would have told
C．must tell D．should have told
【能力拓展】
阅读理解：
It was one of the hottest August days, the fourth, and at twelve o’clock exactly, for a church clock was striking the hour, that a short, heavily built woman of about fifty, carrying a shopping bag, came out from the darkness of an old storehouse where she worked every morning as a checker, and set off along the narrow gray street to a bus stop. Most of the factories and offices in the town were closed for two weeks but the storehouse, which held foodstuffs(食品) and other goods, had remained open during the holidays. The heat, made worse by the heavy smell of petrol from the main street nearby and undisturbed by the slightest current(气流) of cooler air, surrounded her. She was neither dressed nor built for energetic activity on a hot day, being very short indeed, and fat, so that she had to roll a little in order to get along. Her shoes made loud footsteps in the silence of the empty street of closed buildings. The worn old bag she carried caused her to lean over slightly to her right as she walked, but it was clear that she was used to carrying such heavy weights.
Reaching her usual stop, she put down her bag and rested. Then, suddenly realizing being watched, she turned quickly round and looked sharply upward at the tall man behind her.
He was the only other person waiting, and indeed, at that moment, the only other person in the street. She had never spoken to him, yet his face was already familiar to her. She had seen it yesterday, the day before yesterday, and for all she knew, the day before that as well. For the last three or four days anyway, this great nervous lump of a man, waiting for a bus or hanging about on the footpath outside the storehouse, had become a figure of the street for her; and what was more, a figure of a certain definite（明确的） type, though she had yet to put her finger on exactly which type it was. More than once, she had felt his interest in her and she had wondered whether he was a policeman.
1．There were so few people out in this particular street. It was probably mainly because ________.
A．most workers were on holiday
B．it was too hot to be outside at midday
C．the lunch-time break had not yet started
D．very few people lived in the area now
2．From the passage we can know _________________.
A．the woman was fond of dressing up
B．something was wrong with the woman’s right leg
C．almost all the shops were closed except the store house
D．the woman had to walk fast as she was busy
3．The woman turned around at the bus stop because _____________.
A．she heard someone coming B．she thought the bus was coming
C．she thought of her heavy bag D．she felt someone looking at her
4．The underlined phrase “hanging about” in the 3nd paragraph means ___________.
A．thinking about B．walking around
C．looking around D．running about
5．The woman recognized the man by the bus stop because _______________.
A．he was the local policeman
B．he traveled on the bus quite regularly
C．he had been near the store house before
D．he was interested in her
参考答案
高一部分
Units 13-14 (B1)
基础演练
一、1．energy 2．balance 3．mixture 4．chemical 5．function 6．parade 7．conflict 8．argument 9．commercial 10．respect
二、1-5 DCDBA 6-10 BDACD
能力拓展
1-5 BCDBC
1．B 文章第一段第三、四句话为答案依据。
2．C文章第一段第二句话为答案依据。“Most of the factories and offices in the town were closed for two weeks but the storehouse, which held foodstuffs(食品) and other goods, had remained open during the holidays.”
3．D 文章第二段第二句话为答案依据。“suddenly realizing being watched, she turned quickly round and looked sharply upward at the tall man behind her”。
4．B 等车时动作肯定是走来走去，故选walking around。
5．C文章第三段第三、四、五句话。
篇6：高一英语学案Units 7-8 (B1)(人教版高一英语教案教学设计)
【知识网络】
一、重点词汇与短语
1．like的用法小结：
like既可以作动词又可以作介词，表达不同的意思，但是在使用中，总是出错。请注意以下提示：
（1）like：作介词使用，意思是“如同，像，和…一样；例如，诸如”。
例如：
I wish I could sing like her. 我希望能像她那样唱歌。
Mary's dress is red, like mine. 玛丽的衣服是红色的，和我的一样。
There are several people interested, like Mr Jones and Mr Simpson.
许多人很有兴趣，诸如琼斯先生和辛普森先生。
注意介词like构成的词组：
feel like：想要
look like：似乎，好像
（2）like作为动词，常作及物动词使用。意思是“喜欢；爱好；希望；想 ”
例如：
I like bananas. 我喜欢香蕉。
Do you like your teacher? 你喜欢你们的老师吗？
I'd like to see you. 我想见到你。
（3）那么，在使用过程中如何判断like是作介词还是动词呢？
Like如果作谓语动词，就会随着主语的人称、数、格发生变化，还会有时态变化；如果是介词，则无此变化。另外在做题时还要注意like在句子中的具体意思。
2．seem用法小结：
（1）seem后可以接形容词、名词、不定式、分词或介词短语等作表语。
例如：
He seemed quite angry at you. 他好象对你生气了。
Even the bull seemed to feel sorry for the drunk.
连公牛似乎也很为这醉汉感到遗憾。
Danger seems to attend everything they have tried.
他们所尝试做的每件事似乎都带有危险性。
He seemed excited. 他好象很激动。
（2）seem后接to be结构时，有时会省略掉to be。
例如：
The headmaster seems to be a fixture in the school for quite a long period.
校长似乎固定在这个学校工作很长一段时间了。
Yesterday I met a man who seemed (t0 be) the famous actor.
昨天我遇到一个人，他好象是那个有名的演员。
（3）seem后接that或者as if从句。有时that和as if可以省略。
例如：
”At that time, it seemed as if I couldn't think of the right word anyhow.“
”当时,我似乎怎么也想不出一个恰当的字眼来。“
It seems to me that you are right. 我认为你是对的。
It seems to me that there is something funny about the case.
在我看来这件案子有点奇怪。
（4）句型：There seems/seemed (to be)…
There seems to be something wrong with your recorder.
你的录音机好象出问题了/坏了。
There seems to be a man over there in the darkness.
那边好象有个人站在黑暗中。
3．suggest的用法：
（1）suggest表示“提议；提出；建议”的意思，后面常接动词-ing形式，不能接不定式;接that从句时，常用虚拟语气，即should + 动词原形，其中，should可以省略。
例如：
She suggested going there by train. 她建议坐火车去那里。
She suggested that we (should) go there by train.
她建议我们坐火车去那里。
I suggested that we (should) do it like this. 我建议这样做。
（2）suggest还可以表示“暗示；显出”的意思。后面接that从句时，用陈述语气。
例如：
The smile on the boy’s face suggested that he was happy to have given his life to his motherland. 这个男孩脸上的微笑暗示出他很高兴为自己的祖国献出了生命。
When I suggested that some villagers must have come in for a free drink, Mr Thompson shook his head. 当我暗示说,这准是某些村民进来偷喝掉的,汤普森先生摇摇头。
二、词义辨析
1．seem, look 与appear的区别：
seem, look, appear这三个词一般用作半系动词，都可以汉译作“似乎”或“看上去”。
（1）seem所表示的“似乎”或“看来”是以客观的迹象为依据的。
例如：
A pilot noticed a balloon which seemed to be making for a Royal Air Force Station nearby.一位飞行员看到一个气球，好象要飞向附近的英国空军基地。
It seemed certain that this would win the prize.
这一块要得奖似乎是毫无疑问的了。
（2）look所表示的“看来”是以视觉所接受的印象为依据的。例如：
He looked pale and his clothes were in a frightful state.
他看上去脸色苍白，一身衣服弄得一塌糊涂。
My wife was wearing a hat that looked like a lighthouse.
我的妻子戴着一顶看起来好象一座灯塔的帽子。
（3）appear与上两个词的含义似乎没有多大差异，但是如果要表示某种判断是由被歪曲了的印象而得出的，或者是表示“表面似乎如此，而事实不是如此”的意思时，最好用appear。
例如：
Babies of two months old do not appear to be reluctant to enter the water.
两个月的婴儿并不显得不肯下水。
The actress is thirty-five years old, but she appears a lot younger.
那个女演员三十五岁了，但是她看上去年轻得多。
2．give up, give in, give out的区别：
（1）give in to somebody/something表示“向某人/某物屈服、让步；投降”。后面不能直接接名词，属于不及物动词的范畴。
例如：
He would rather die than give in. 他宁死不屈。
He has given in to my idea. 他已经顺从了我的想法。
（2）give up: 后面接名词或者动词-ing形式，属于及物动词的范畴，意思是“放弃”。例如：
He gave up his position as then general manager. 他辞去了总经理的职位。
He had a hard time giving up smoking. 他戒烟很辛苦的。
（3）give out: 表示“分发；用完，用尽”的意思。
例如：
You are required to give out the pamphlets
要求你分发这些小册子。
Give the money out to the children.
把钱分给孩子们。
Our food supply gave out at last.
我们的食物终于用完了。
His strength gave out(= run out). = He ran out of strength.=He was worn out.=He was tired out.他已精疲力竭。
三、重点句型
1．What do you think we can do to protect our cultural relics?
此句中的do you think为插入语。句子的疑问语序由它体现，而其它成分用陈述语序。做单项填空题时要注意这个现象。
2．Where there is a river, there is a city.
And we should build a website where people can look at the pictures and paintings.
这两句都含有where引导的从句。第一句为where引导地点状语从句，第二句为where引导一个定语从句。在where引导定语从句时，其前面往往有一个表示地点的词作先行 词，此句中的website即先行词。
再如：
We should be sent where we are most needed. (where引导地点状语从句)
We should be sent to the place where we are most needed. （where引导定语从句）
应该派我们到最需要的地方去。
3．Ronaldo has done more than just playing football.
Yao Ming has more than just size: he also has great skill and speed.
这两句都包含有more than just结构。此处的意思是“不仅…，不止…”。
再如：
He did more than just helping us out, he also gave us a lot of money to set up a new school for poor children.
他不只是帮助我们摆脱了困境，而且还给了我们一大笔钱为穷孩子建了一所新学校。
They were more than willing to help you. 他们非常乐意帮助你。
Some of the stories were really more than could be believed.
有些故事实在令人难以相信。
四、语法复习
英语的语态有两种：主动语态和被动语态。 主语是动作的发出者为主动语态；主语是动作的接受者为被动语态。
被动语态的注意事项：
（1）若宾语补足语是不带to 的不定式，变为被动语态时，该不定式前要加”to“。此类动词往往是感官动词。如：feel, hear, help, listen to, look at, make, observe, see, notice, watch 等等。
例如：
The teacher made me go out of the classroom.
-->I was made to go out of the classroom (by the teacher). We saw him play football on the playground. -->He was seen to play football on the playground.
（2）带有情态动词的被动语态：即：情态动词+ be +过去分词，构成被动语态。
例如：
Coal can be used to produce electricity for agriculture and industry.
煤炭可以用来为工农业生产发电。
（3）短语动词是一个整体，不可丢掉后面的介词或副词。
例如：
This is a photo of the power station that has been set up in my hometown. （注意up）
这是我的家乡刚刚建设的一座发电站的照片。
My sister will be taken care of by Grandma. （注意of）
我妹妹将由我奶奶照顾。
Such a thing has never been heard of before. （注意of）
过去从未听说过这样的事情。
（4）由believe, consider, declare, expect, feel , report, say, see, announce, suppose, think, understand等动词构成的被动结构：
It is said that… 据说
It is reported that… 据报道
It is believed that… 大家相信
It is hoped that… 大家希望
已经宣布我们的飞行员已经安全归来。
（5）不及物动词或动词短语如：appear, die, disappear, lost heart, come true, fall asleep, happen, last, lie, remain, sit, spread, stand, break out, keep silence, take place. 无被动语态。要想正确地使用被动语态，就须注意哪些动词是及物的，哪些是不及物的。特别是一词多义的动词往往有两种用法。解决这一问题唯有在学习过程中多留意积累。
试比较下列句子：
（错） The price has been risen. （不及物）
（对） The price has risen.
（错） The accident was happened last week. （不及物）
（对） The accident happened last week.
（6） 不能用于被动语态的及物动词或动词短语:
fit, have, hold, marry, own, wish, cost, notice, watch agree with, arrive at / in, shake hands
with, succeed in, suffer from, happen to, take part in, walk into, belong to。
例如：
This key just fits the lock. 这把钥匙就是开这把锁的。
Your story agrees with what had already been heard. 你的故事与（我们）已经听到的说法是一致的。
（7） 系动词无被动语态：
appear, be become, fall, feel, get, grow, keep, look, remain, seem, smell, sound, stay, taste,
turn。
例如：
It sounds good. 听起来声音不错。
It tastes delicious. 尝起来很香。
（8） 带同源宾语的及物动词，反身代词，相互代词，不能用于被动语态：die, death, dream, live, life, smile。
例如：
She dreamed a bad dream last night. 昨天晚上她做了一个噩梦。
He died a heroic death. 他死得很英勇。
（9） 动词wash, clean, cook, iron, look, cut, sell, read, wear, feel, draw, write, sell, drive… 用主动形式表示被动：
The book sells well. 这本书销路好。
This knife cuts easily. 这刀子很好用。
（10） 特殊结构：make sb. heard / understood：使别人能听见 / 理解自己have something done ： 要别人做某事
She spoke at the top of her voice to make herself heard.
她扯着嗓子喊叫，目的是让别人听到她的话。
I had my hair cut yesterday. 我昨天理发了。
【考点透视 考例精析】
[考点] 考察地点状语从句。
[考例1] There were marks on her trousers ______ she had wiped her hands.
A．where B．which C．when D．that
[解析] A which和that引导定语从句，故排除；when引导时间状语从句，与句子的意思不符，应该用where引导地点状语从句，本题的意思是“她的裤子上她檫过手的地方有脏痕”。
[拓展] 要注意where不仅可以引导地点状语从句，还可以引导定语从句。这时，where前面往往有一个表示地点的名词。
例如：
They have never gone to the place where we intended to meet before.
[考点] 考查被动语态。
[考例2] Many man-made satellites __________ space by China over the past five years.
A．was been sent up B．was sent for
C．have been sent up into D．has sent into
[解析] C 根据句子结构看应该使用被动语态，因而排除D项；表示“发射升空”用send up into…。sent up“发射”，其后不能接名词，send for意思是“派人去请”，与句子的意思不相符合。
[考点] 考查固定搭配的用法。
[考例3] --I’m going to see the victim’s brother.
--I’d rather you __________.
A．didn’t B．have not C．don’t D．do
[解析] A 第一个人所使用的时态为将来时，表示将来的打算。但是第二个人用的是固定句型：I would rather somebody did something. 所以只能选A项。
[拓展] 另外注意句型Somebody would rather do something than do something 。两个动词都用原形。
例如：
I would rather do some work than stay home every day.
[考点] 考查时态和语态。
[考例4] The mayor of Beijing says that all construction work for the Beijing Olympics ________ by .
A．has been completed B．has completed
C．will have been completed D．will have completed
[解析] C 首先，此句的construction work 与complete是动宾关系，construction work作从句的主语，所以应该使用被动语态。再由 by 2006可以知道，该动作现在尚未完成，所以用将来完成时态。
【基础演练】
一、根据所给首字母或括号中的汉语意思填写句子空格中所缺的单词。
1．After the earthquake, it is very difficult to r_____________ the buildings and other things.
2．Columbus said that he had discovered the new c_____________.
3．The earthquake d__________ several buildings.
4．The o___________ language of Japan is Japanese.
5．As more and more cars entered people’s homes, p_______ is becoming more and more serious.
6．These two countries have different__________(文化).
7．He had _____________（包括）a large number of funny stories in the speech.
8．Will you help me ___________(准备)for the get-together of the old classmates?
9．We not only communicate with words, but also with ___________(手势).
10．Can you find our _________(位置) on this map?
二、单项填空：
1．--Smoking is bad for your health.
--Yes, I know. But I simply can’t __________.
A．give it up B．give it in C．give it out D．give it away
2．--The window is dirty.
--I know. It ________ for weeks.
A．hasn’t cleaned B．didn’t clean
C．wasn’t cleaned D．hasn’t been cleaned
3．To enjoy the scenery, Irene would rather spend long hours on the train ________ travel by air.
A．as B．to C．than D．while
4．His behavior at the party last night seemed rather out of _____. Many of us were quite surprised.
A．practice B．place C．polite D．pity
5．–What can I do for you?
--I’d like to borrow a science book, _________ that is simple and written in English.
A．which B．one C．but D．all
6．_______ the poor, Tom himself has been living a very simple life.
A．Devoted to help B．Devoting to helping
C．Devoted to helping D．Devoting to help
7．--Do you like Nack?
--Yes, Nack is good, kind, hardworking and intelligent; ______, I can’t speak too highly of him.
A． as a result B．in a word C．by the way D．on the contrary
8．--What’s the matter with you?
--Oh, I’m not feeling well in the stomach. I __________ so much fried fish just now.
A．shouldn’t eat B．mustn’t have eaten
C．shouldn’t have eaten D．mustn’t eat
9．He lives in a big house whose windows ___ over an avenue with trees and flowers on both sides.
A．look into B．look up C．look out D．look on
10．He became a millionaire at last, _________ himself the richest one in his family.
A．to make B．making C．made D．to be made
【能力拓展】
阅读理解：
There are some very good things about open education. This way of teaching allows the students to grow as people, and to develop their own interests in many subjects. Open education allows students to be responsible for their own education, as they are responsible for what they do in life. Some students do badly in a traditional classroom. The open classroom may allow them to enjoy learning. Some students will be happier in an open education school. They will not have to worry about grades or rules. For students who worry about these things a lot, it is a good idea to be in an open classroom.
But many students will not do well in an open classroom. For some students, there are too few rules. These students will do little in school. They will not make good use of open education. Because open education is so different from traditional education, these students may have a problem getting used to making so many choices. For many students it is important to have some rules in the classroom. They worry about the rules even when there are no rules. Even a few rules will help this kind of students. The last point about open education is that some traditional teachers do not like it. Many teachers do not believe in open education. Teachers who want to have an open classroom may have many problems at their schools.
You now know what open education is. Some of its good points and bad points have been explained. You may have your own opinion about open education. The writer thinks that open education is a good idea, but only in theory. In fact, it may not work very well in a real class or school. The writer believes that most students, but of course not all students, want some structure in their classes. They want and need to have rules. In some cases, they must be made to study some subjects. Many students are pleased to find subjects they have to study interesting. They would not study those subjects if they did not have to.
1．Open education allows the students to__________.
A．grow as the educated B．be responsible for their future
C．develop their own interests D．discover subjects outside class
2．Open education may be a good idea for the students who__________.
A．enjoy learning B．worry about grades
C．do well in a traditional classroom D．are responsible for what they do in life.
3．Some students will do little in an open classroom because__________.
A．there are too few rules
B．they hate activities
C．open education is similar to the traditional education
D．they worry about the rules
4．Which of the following is NOT mentioned in the passage?
A．Some traditional teachers do not like it.
B．Many teachers do not believe in open education.
C．Teachers may have problems in open classrooms.
D．The teacher’s feelings and attitudes are important to the students.
5．Which of the following best summarizes the passage?
A．Open education is a really complex idea.
B．Open education is better than traditional education.
C．Teachers dislike open education.
D．The writer thinks that open education is a good idea in practice.
参考答案
高一部分
Units 7-8 (B1)
基础演练
一、1．restore 2．continent 3．damaged 4．official 5．pollution 6．cultures 7．included 8．prepare 9．gestures 10．position
二、1-5 ADCBB
能力拓展
1-5 CBADA
1．C 这是一个细节题。文章第一段中的“This way of teaching allows the students to grow as people, and to develop their own interests in many subjects.”提供了解题信息。
2．B 细节题。参考文章第一段的“They will not have to worry about grades or rules.”。
3．A 细节题。参考文章第二段中“For some students, there are too few rules. These students will do little in school.”这两句话。
4．D 综合判断题。阅读文章可知，其中没有提到D项所述的内容。
5．A 主旨大意题。文章提到了正反两方面的观点，各有道理，说明问题比较复杂。
篇7：高一英语学案Units 17-18 (B1)(人教版高一英语教案教学设计)
【知识网络】
一、重点词汇与短语
1．bother：
（1）作“打扰；烦扰”讲，bother为及物动词，其后可以直接跟宾语。例如：
Will it bother you if I turn the television on? 我开电视会不会吵着你?
I'm busy, don't bother me. 我正忙着，不要打扰我。
I'm sorry to bother you, but can you direct me to the railway station?
劳驾,你能不能告诉我到火车站怎么走?
（2）作为不及物动词bother常与about, with, to连用，意思是“麻烦，烦恼，操心”。
例如：
Don't bother with/about it. 别为此操心。
Don't bother about it. 不用麻烦了。
Don't bother about answering his letter. 你不必回复他的信。
（3）bother可以作名词使用，此时它是不可数名词，意思是“麻烦，不便”。
例如：
We had a lot of bother in repairing the press machine.
修理这台印刷机费了很大劲。
They had a lot of bother on the trip because they were not so familiar with that area.
路上他们遇到了很多麻烦，因为他们对那个地区不是很熟悉。
We had a lot of bother finding our way.
我们经过很多麻烦才找到这里。
The guests had a lot of bother finding their way here.
客人们费了很大劲才找到这里。
（4）习惯用语：主要作表示不高兴的强调用语。
例如：
Bother the lot of you! 你们这些人真讨厌！
Bother it! 讨厌!
2．由make构成的常用词组：
be made from…：由…制成（看不见原材料）
be made of…：由…制成（看得见原材料）
be made into…：制成…
be made in…：由…制造（in后接制造地）
be made up of…：由…构成、组成（=be composed of=consist of=constitute）
make up：编造；和解，言归于好；化妆，打扮
make up for…：弥补…
make use of…：利用…
make up one’s mind：打定主意，决定
make sense：讲得通，有意义
make fun of…：取笑…
例如：
Paper is made from wood.
纸是由木材制成的。
This bridge is made of stone.
这座桥是石头砌成的。
Wood can be made into many useful things, such as tables, chairs, etc.
木材可以制成很多有用的东西，比如桌子、椅子等等。
That beautiful car is made in China.
那辆漂亮的车是在中国制造的。
Our class is made up of 36 boys and 16 girls.
我们班由36名男生和16名女生组成。
He made up a very wonderful story for his being late.
他为自己的迟到编造了一个很精彩的故事（借口）。
Did he make up to you?
他给你和解了吗？
You should make up for what you have lost.
你应该把失去的东西弥补回来。
We should make full use of our precious time.
我们应该充分利用我们宝贵的时间。
They have made up their minds to come tomorrow.
他们已经打定主意明天来。
What you said doesn’t make any sense, so I can’t make sense of it.
你说的话毫无意义，所以，我无法理解。
二、词义辨析
1．bear, suffer, endure, tolerate, stand这组动词都有“忍受”的意思
（1）bear 和 suffer 可以表示“对强加的任何东西的忍受”，bear 侧重于表示“忍受沉重或难办的事”。
例如：
In the end I could not bear it. 最后，我受不了啦。
When my old friend Brian urged me to accept a cigarette, it was more than I could bear.
当老朋友布赖恩怂恿我接受一只香烟时，我就受不住了。
（2）suffer 侧重于表示“忍受或经受令人不愉快的、甚至于痛苦的事”。
例如：
No benefactions and research endowments can make up for the change in character which the university city has suffered.
捐款和科研经费决不能弥补大学城所经受的性质上的变化。
（3）endure 强调“长时间的忍受痛苦而不屈服”。
例如：
What can't be cured must be endured.
治不好的病就必须忍受。（谚语）
Travelers in space have to endure many discomforts in their rockets.
宇宙旅行家不得不在火箭中忍受许多不舒适的东西
（4）tolerate 和 stand 都表示“忍受令人生厌的事”。tolerate 的内涵是“为了和平或融洽而不反对”。
例如：
Why people are prepared to tolerate a four-hour journey each day for the dubious privilege of living in the country is beyond my ken.
为了农村生活的模糊的好处，人们为何甘愿忍受每天在路上花四个小时，这便超越了我的见识了。
Considering his home situation, he had to tolerate his wife.
考虑到家中的情形，他不得不忍让妻子了。
（5）stand 常与 bear 通用，如果用词确切，stand 总包含着“不退让”、“不畏缩”的“忍受”。
例如：
He can stand more pain than anyone else I know.
他比我认识的任何人都更能忍受痛苦。
He stood the test of war. 他经受住了战争的考验。
2．but, however, while的区别：
（1）but作“但是，然而”讲，是并列连词。
例如：
I was going to write, but I lost your address.
我本来要写信的，可是把你的地址弄丢了。
The journey was long but interesting. 旅途虽然长，但是很有趣。
（1）however也作“然而，可是”讲，但它是副词。它的用法比but更正式，可以用在句首、句中和句尾，前后必须有逗号和其它成分隔开。
例如：
He hasn't arrived. He may, however, come later.
他还未到，不过，他可能过一会儿来。
”I'd like to go with you; however, my hands are full.“
”我很想和你一块儿去,可是我忙不过来。“
（2）but和however含有转折的意味，而while则强调前者和后者的对比，这时while为连词。
例如：
While I understand what you say, I can't agree with you.
虽然我理解你的意思，但我还是不同意。
You like tennis, while I'd rather read. 你爱打网球，但我爱看书。
三、重点句型
1．I was moving forward over a slope that seemed safe when suddenly without warning my world dropped out from under my skis.
这个句子中，when引导的句子表示“就在那时，突然”的意思。不要翻译成“当…的时候”。再如：I was cooking in the kitchen when the telephone rang loudly. 我正在厨房做饭，突然/就在那时，电话铃声大作。
2．It was a time in which many sad things happened to her.
此句中的a time表示一个时期，in which引导一个定语从句。要注意：something happen to somebody表示“某人出了什么事情”，此处to为介词；而我们还会看到以下句型：I happened to meet him in the street. 在这个句型中， to是不定式符号，此句意思与下一句相同：=It happened that I met him in the street.
3．Oprah Winfrey is not just a very successful TV personality in the US, she is also a woman who has inspired millions.
此句中的“not just…also…”表示“不仅…而且…”，再如：Einstein was not just a great scientist, he was also a music lover. 另外这个句子中的动词inspire的用法也要注意，除了本句的主动语态外，它还经常用于被动语态。例如：
I was inspired to work harder than ever before.
我受激励比以往任何时候都更加努力地工作。
四、语法复习
主谓一致:
1．由and连接两个名词或代词作主语时，一般情况下谓语动词用复数形式，但是如果and所连接的两个名词指同一人物、同一事物、同一概念时，谓语动词要用单数形式。
例如：
Li Ming and Zhang Hua are good students. (指不同的人)
李明和张华是好学生。
Both the teachers and the students are here. (指不同的人)
老师和学生都在这里。
The writer and poet lives in the village. (指同一个人)
这位作家兼诗人主在这个村子里。
Husband and wife forms a family.
夫妻组成家庭。
Note: 1).由 every, each, many a, no ...等词修饰的名词作主语时,谓语动词用单数形式。
例如:
Each man and each woman is invited. 每个男人和女人都邀请了。
No boy and girl is there now. 现在那里没有一个男孩和女孩。
Many a boy and many a girl has been invited. 很多男孩和女孩都被邀请了。
In China every boy and every girl has the right to receive education.
在中国每个男孩和女孩都有接受教育的权利。
（2）.当两个主语为不可分的东西时，谓语动词用单数形式。
例如：
A watch and chain was found on the desk. 桌子上发现了表。
Bread and butter is nutritious. 奶油面包有营养。
2．由or, not only... but also..., either...or, neither...nor...连接主语时,谓语与靠近的主语一致，即就近一致的原则。
例如：
Either you or I am mad. 要么是你要么是我疯了。
Neither you nor he is right. 你和它都不对。
Not only the teacher but also his family were friendly to me.
不仅老师，而且他的家人都对我很友好。
3．当主语后跟有with, along with, together with, besides, except, like, including, as well as, rather than等词时,谓语动词根据前面的主语变化。
例如：
All but one were here just now.
除了一个，刚才其他所有的（人）都在这里。
A library with five thousand books is offered to the nation.
有着五千本书的一个图书馆提供给了国家。
She as well as the other teachers is going to another park.
她和其他老师都要去另一个公园。
A farmer together with some workers is about to help us.
一个农民和几个工人即将来帮助我们。
4．某些词结尾字母为s, 但并不是复数形式,如: physics, maths, economics (经济学), politics, news, means, works(工厂), 作主语时用单数形式。
例如：
Physics is very important. 物理是很重要的。
Every means has been tried. 每一种方法都已经试过了。
This works was built in 1982. 这家工厂是1982年建的。
5．表示双部分工具的名称,衣服名称等作主语时, 谓语用复数形式, 如: trousers, shoes, glasses, goods, clothes. 如果这些词由 pair, piece, kind + of 修饰,则用单数形式.
例如：
My trousers are white and his clothes are black.
我的裤子是白色的，他的衣服是黑色的。
A pair of shoes is lying here.
一双鞋放在那里。
These kinds of glasses are popular. (kinds为复数时，谓语动词用复数)
这几种玻璃很流行。
6．动名词, 不定式, 从句作主语时,谓语动词一般要用单数。
例如：
To see is to believe. 眼见为实。
Reading is a good way to become educated. 读书是变得有教养的一种好方法。
When he will come is not known. 他会什么时候来还不知道。
7．集体名词, 如: people, police, cattle, youth 作主语时,谓语动词用复数形式。
例如：
The police like to help people.警察乐于助人。
The youth of our country are happier than the other people.
我们国家的年轻人比别的国家的更幸福。
8．集体名词, 如: family, crowd, class等, 如把它们当作整体看,谓语动词用单数; 如把它们当作若干个体来看,用复数。
例如：
Our family is very happy. 我们的家庭很幸福。
My family are all football fans. 我的家人都是足球迷。
9．表示距离, 时间, 长度,价值, 金额, 重量等的词,用复数形式时,谓语动词用单数；如果要表示具体的多少，强调复数的意义时，谓语动词用复数形式。
例如：
Two thousands dollars is a large sum. 两千美圆是一大笔钱。
Two hours is enough. 两个小时就足够了。
The fifty miles were covered by the winner in three hours.
获胜者三个小时就走完了这五十英里。
10．more than one+名词作主语时，谓语动词用单数; more than two, three ...+名词作主语时，谓语动词用复数。
例如：
More than one boy has been there. 不止一个孩子去过那里。
More than two boys have been there. 不止两个孩子去过那里。
11．英语中，“the + 形容词”可以相当于名词使用。这个结构指人时谓语动词用复数, 指物时谓语动词用单数。
例如：
The rich are for the decision but the poor are against it. (同意...反对)
有钱人支持这个决定但是穷人反对它。
The green is hers. 这件绿色的东西是她的。
12．关系代词who, that, which等在定语从句中作主语时，其谓语动词的数应该与句中先行词的数一致。
例如：
I, who am only a common worker, will retire in two years.
只是个普通工人的我两年后就要退休了。
【考点透视 考例精析】
[考点] 倒装结构。
[考例1] I failed in the final examination last term and only then _________ the importance of studies.
A．I realized B．I had realized C．had I realized D．did I realize
[解析] D “only+状语”放在句首时，主句部分就要倒装，把助动词、情态动词或者be动词提前。因为这个句子是一般过去时，所以在主句前加上did，谓语动词要还原成原形。
[拓展] 这种倒装句要特别注意助动词提前以后，后面的动词要用原形，而被加上的助动词要体现句子的时态。例如：
Only in this way can we do the work well. (只有用这种方法，我们才能把工作做好。)
Only after they came did we returned home. (只是等他们来到以后我们才回家。)
[考点] 考查it的用法-强调结构。
[考例2] Could it be in the room _______ we had a talk last night _______ you left your keys?
A．in which, when B．which, when C．where, that D．where, when
[解析] C 这是强调句的一般疑问句形式。被强调的部分为“in the room where we had a talk last night”，其中where引导一个定语从句修饰room。
[考点] 考查主谓一致。
[考例3] Every possible means ________ to prevent the air pollution, but the sky is still not clear.
A．is used B．are used C．has been used D．have been used
[解析] A 第二个句子的时态可以判断出第一句应该用一般现在时。
【基础演练】
一、根据所给首字母或括号中的汉语意思填写句子空格中所缺的单词。
1．We all a_________ her for the way she saved the drowning boy.
2．The young heiress（继承人） was so g_______ that she gave all her money away in a couple of years.
3．Some of my r__________, my mother's aunt and uncle, live in America.
4．It's not s________ the company's in debt - it's been completely mismanaged(错误经营).
5．The table had a shiny s________ , but underneath it was dull and rough.
6．He lives at the _________(极端) edge of the forest.
7．That small country is a ___________(多山的) country.
8．At the _________ （底部）of the stairs there is some rubbish.
9．At the __________(毕业) ceremony, the headmaster handed him the certificate.
10． __________(农业) plays an extremely important part in a country’s economy.
二、单项填空：
1．Each soldier and each sailor ______ a rifle.
A．are given B．was given C．being given D．were given
2．I don’t skate now, but I _______ when I was a child.
A．used to B．am used to it C．used D．used to do
3．Who is it up ________ the first company ________ is run by the state?
A．to take charge of, which B．to to take charge of, that
C．for to take charge of, that D．to to take charge of, which
4．People in the western countries make ______ a rule to buy Christmas present for their relatives and friends.
A．that B．it C．this D．as
5．The Foreign Minister said,”______ our hope that the two sides will work towards peace.”
A．This is B．There is C．That is D．It is
6．It is reported that the United States uses _______ energy as the whole of Europe.
A．as twice B．twice much C．twice much as D．twice as much
7．A lot of children at the school do not live in the town, but come from the _______ countryside.
A．surrounded B．surrounding C．surroundings D．surround
8．Is it less than a single day ________ the girl ________ father is a barber to change her hair from black to white?
A．when, whose B．when, that
C．that it takes, that D．that it takes, whose
9．What the boss said at the meeting _______ the urgentest problems in our company at the moment.
A．referred to B．referred to… as
C．referred to …for D．referred back to
10．The manager _______ many foreign people when he was abroad.
A．keep into contacts with B．came into contact with
C．make contacts with D．keep in contacts with
【能力拓展】
阅读理解：
You might not want a holiday in your home town, but there is probably someone who does. And in exchange, you could have a cheap vacation anywhere in the world.
Just picture the scene: you’re watching the sunset from the balcony（阳台）of a Caribbean island house. It’s large and free, as long as you don’t mind the owners living in your home at the same time.
All you need to be a home-swapper is the Internet and a rough idea of when and where you want to go on holiday. When you find someone whose dates match yours , and who wants to visit your area, you’re all set swap（v.交换）.
The advantages are numerous; you can save a fortune in accommodation（膳宿）costs. You could get to use the owner’s car, boat, bikes, pool or gym. You might even be able to come to an arrangement about looking about after each other’s pets!
You also get to live like a local, and you might be invited round to neighbor’s homes for tea, barbecues（吃烤肉的野餐）and tips on the area. People say that these cultural experiences are the memories that last. Plus, instead of one tiny hotel room, you have an entire house where you can make yourself at home. And it’s not cold and impersonal like a hotel room.
Of course, there are disadvantages. A lot of effort and communication are needed before the arrangements are finalized. Nobody wants a stranger living in their house, sleeping in their bed and using their bathroom, so you have to get to know each other well beforehand（预先）.
Some people are concerned about theft or property damage, but in reality, this is very rare. Most home-exchangers have the view that “If they can trust me with their house, I can trust them with mine.”The worst complaint people have is the difference in standards of cleanliness.
If you’re interested in home-exchange for your next holiday, start by contacting a famous agency like homelink.org and intervac.co.uk. These agencies will also have advice about preparing for a home-exchange.
1．What will you remember most probably if you have swapped your home with another?
A．The sunset B．The car or boat of the home owner.
C．The pet of the home owner D．A gathering in his neighborhood.
2．The underlined word “tips” refers to _______.
A．the pointed ends of something B．gifts of money given for small service
C．helpful pieces of advice D．places where unwanted waste is left
3．If you want to exchange your home with another, you should do all of the following EXCEPT _______.
A．inviting your neighbors home for tea B．trying to know each other
C．surfing the Internet for information D．finding someone who wants visit your area
4．Which of the following is the best title for the text?
A．Where to Live When You Are on a Trip?
B．Home Away from Home.
C．Do You Want a Holiday in Your Hometown?
D．Advantages and Disadvantages of Home-exchange.
参考答案
高一部分
Units 17-18 (B1)
基础演练
一、1. admired 2. generous 3. relations 4. surprising 5. surface 6. extreme 7. mountainous 8. bottom 9. graduation 10. Agriculture
二、1-4 BABBD 6-10 DBDAB
能力拓展
1-4 DCAB
1．D 细节题。第五段“People say that these cultural experiences are the memories that last.”一句中that last是the memories的定语从句，句意为：人们说这些文化经历是延续长久的记忆。
2．C 词义理解题。在四个选项都是tip的意义，但从上下文可知，此处tips指的是“在陌生的邻里之间得到的东西”，而其后的on the area意为“关于这个地区”，所以选C,即邻里会告诉你一些在这个地区旅游的建议。
3．A 综合推断题。A项与第五段句首“…and you might be invited round to neighbor’s homes for tea”有出入，而其它选项文中都有依据。
4．B 主旨大意题。首段的“exchange”，文中的“home-swapper”、“swap”，以及最后两段的“home-exchangers”、“home-exchange”等说明互换住房是文章介绍的内容，所以应选B项，该句意为“离家后的住房“。
篇8：高一英语学案Units 3-4 (B1)(人教版高一英语教案教学设计)
【知识网络】
一、重点词汇与短语
1．prefer的用法小结：
（1）prefer常与介词to连用，意思是“更喜欢；宁愿”，表示取前者舍后者。例如：
Little Tom prefers coffee to tea. 小汤姆喜欢咖啡胜过茶。
He preferred swimming to skating. 他喜欢游泳胜过滑冰。
（2）prefer后面接不定式时常与rather than 或者instead of连用，意思是“宁愿做某事而不做某事”，rather than后面的不定式可以加to，也可以省略。例如：
He preferred to die rather than (to) steal. 或者 He preferred to die instead of stealing.
他宁愿死也不愿意去偷窃。
I prefer to work rather than （to） sit idle. 我宁愿工作而不喜欢闲坐。
2．consider的用法小结：
（1）consider可以表示“考虑；思考”的意思。后面可以接名词或者动词的-ing形式。例如：
I am considering going abroad. 我正在考虑出国。
The court would not even consider his claim for the old man's legacy.
法庭根本不会考虑他所提出的对老人遗产的要求。
（2）consider还可以表示“认为；以为”的意思，常用于以下结构：
consider somebody / something to be / to have done …
consider + n. + adj.
consider + it + adj. / n. (+ to do / that clause)
consider + that clause
I consider it a great honor. 我认为这是极大的荣幸。
We consider that the driver is not to blame. 我们认为这不是司机的过错。
He is considered to have broken the window. 有人认为是他打碎了窗子。
We all consider him loyal to friends. 我们都认为他对朋友忠诚。
I don’t consider that it will turn out fine this afternoon.
我认为今天下午天不会转晴。
（3）习惯用法：
all things considered: 全面地考虑。在句中作状语，用于概括或者总结。
All things considered, our old car is no good, so we should buy a new one now.
总的来说，我们的旧车已经没有用了，我们现在应该买辆新的。
（4）considering：表示“鉴于，考虑到，顾及”的意思。例如：
Considering how sick he is, he should go to see the doctor.
鉴于他病得那样厉害，他应该去看医生。
3．The population in and around San Francisco is now ten times more than it was in 1906.
英语中表示倍数的三种常用表达方式：
（1）A is three(four, etc.) times bigger(higher, longer, wider, etc.) than B. 意思是：A比B 大（高、长、宽等）三（四…）倍。例如：
Their classroom is three times bigger than ours.
他们的课室比我们的大三倍（是我们课室的四倍）。
The Pearl River is five times longer than this one.
珠江比这条河长五倍（是这条河的六倍）。
（2）A is three(four, etc.) times as big(high, long, wide, etc.) as B. 意思是“A的大小（高度，长度，宽度等）是B的三（四）倍”。例如：
Asia is four times as large as Europe. 亚洲的面积是欧洲的四倍。
He is twice as tall as an ordinary man.
他的高度是一个普通人的两倍。
（3）A is three(four, etc) times the size(height, length, width, etc.) of B. 意思是“A的大小（高度、长度、宽度等是B的三（四）倍”。例如：
The new building is four times the size of the old one.
这座新楼是那座旧楼的四倍大。
This tree is twice the height of that one. 这棵树是那棵树的两倍。
二、词义辨析
1．one 、the one 、that 、it的区别：
（1）one用来代替前面提到的名词，既可以指人由可以指物。用于泛指，相当于a/an+名词，复数形式为ones。
例如：
I am looking for a house and I like one with a garden.
我正在找房子，我喜欢一幢带有花园的房子。
I can’t find my hat. I think I must buy one.
我的帽子找不到了。我想我必须再买一顶了。
There is a young man and some old ones in the house.
这座房子里有一个年轻人和几个老人。
（2）the one：用来代替同类事物中特指的另一个。例如：
I like the recorder better than the one I bought last year.
与去年我买的那个录音机相比，我更喜欢这一个。（这时，the one 和that可以互换）
（3）that表示与前面所指的名词为同类，但不是同一个；而it所指的名词为同一个。That既可以代替可数名词，也可以代替不可数名词。例如：
The population of China is larger than that of any other country in the world.
中国的人口比世界上任何国家的都要多。
I have a very good TV set. It is very large and beautiful.
2．take place, happen 与break out的区别：
这三个词都是“发生”的意思，而且都没有被动语态。
（1）happen表示“（偶然）发生”，或者“碰巧做某事”，强调事情的偶然性。
例如：
That accident happened at the corner.
那场事故发生在拐角处。
I happened to meet him in the street.？
=It happened that I met him in the street.
我偶然在街上遇到他。
（2）take place指“发生”，可以是有计划地安排，也可以是无计划或者安排。例如：
When will the ceremony take place? 仪式什么时候举行？
A strong earthquake took place. 一场强烈地震发生了
（3）break out指“（火灾、战争等）突然发生、爆发”。例如：
The war broke out between the north and the south. 南北战争爆发了。
Fire broke out in the neighborhood last night.
昨晚附近发生了火灾。
三、重点句型
1．Where would you prefer going?
I would prefer to do something.
I prefer to do something rather than do something.
这是动词prefer的几个常用结构，在使用时要把每一个搭配分清楚。
2．Is anybody seeing you off?
这是一个现在进行时态表示将来的句型。值得注意的是并非所有动词都可以用此结构，常用此结构的动词有：come, go , leave, start, return, see, stay等等。
3．Before she could move, she heard a loud noise, which grew to a terrible roar.
此句中的before意思是“还没有来得及…就…”，要注意before的中文翻译。
再如：
Before I could get up from my bed, the general gave me a telephone call and told me to start at once.
4．It didn’t take long before the wooden building was swallowed by the fire.
此句中的before意思是“不久以后就…”；如果用肯定句，before的意思就会有大的变化。
例如：
It will take long before we can get the key.
我们还要过很久才能拿到钥匙。（before的意思是“要多长时间以后才…”）
四、语法复习
（一）现在进行时的用法小结：
1．现在进行时的基本用法：
（1）表示说话人说话时 正在发生的事情。
We are waiting for you.
我们正在等你。
（2）表示习惯性的进行，即表示长期的或重复性的动作，说话时动作未必正在进行。
Mr. White is writing his new book.
怀特先生正在写他的新书。(说话时并未在写，只处于写作的状态。)
（3）表示动作的渐变。常可以用此用法的动词有：get, grow, become, turn, run, go, begin等。
The leaves are turning green. 树叶正在变成绿色。
（4）现在进行时 与always, constantly, forever 等词连用，表示反复发生的动作或持续存在的状态，往往带有说话人的主观色彩。
You are always changing your mind.
你总是变来变去的（拿不定主意）。
He is always bothering me. 他老是打扰我。
（5）某些动词的现在进行时形式可以用来表示将来，意思是：”意图“、”打算“、”安排“、常用来指人。常用词为 come, go, start, arrive, leave, stay等。
They are starting to learn English tomorrow.
他们明天将开始学习英语。
（一）定语从句复习第一部分：
1．定语从句（Attributive Clauses）在句中起定语的作用，修饰一个名词或代词，有时还可以修饰整个主句。被修饰的词叫做先行词。定语从句通常出现在先行词之后，由关系词（关系代词或关系副词）引出。
关系代词所代替的先行词是代表人或物的名词或代词，并在句中充当主语、宾语、定语等成分。关系代词在定语从句中作主语时，定语从句谓语动词的人称和数要和先行词保持一致。
（1）who, whom, that代替的先行词是指人的名词或代词：
Is he the man who/that wants to see you?
他就是你想见的人吗？（who/that在从句中作主语）
He is the man whom/ that I saw yesterday.
他就是我昨天见的那个人。（whom/that在从句中作宾语）
（2） whose 既可以指人又可以指物，只用作定语；若指物，它还可以同of which互换。
例如：
They rushed over to help the man whose car had broken down.
那个人的汽车坏了，他们都跑过去帮忙。
Please pass me the book whose (of which) cover is red.
请递给我那本红皮的书。
（3）which, that 所代替的先行词是事物的名词或代词，在从句中可作主语、宾语等，
例如：
A prosperity which / that had never been seen before appears in the countryside. 农村出现了前所未有的繁荣。（which / that在句中作主语）
The package (which / that) you are carrying is very heavy. 你拿的包很重。(which / that在句中作宾语)
2．关系代词不能用that的情况 ：
（1） 在引导非限定性定语从句时。指人只能用who/whom/whose，指物只能用which/whose。例如：
The tree, which is four hundred years old, is very famous here.
这棵树在这里很出名，它已经有4树龄了。
The story, which my brother told yesterday, is very interesting.
我弟弟昨天讲的那个故事很有趣。
（2） 介词后不能用that，指人只能用whom/whose，指物只能用which/whose。例如：
We depend on the land from which we get our food.
我们依靠土地来收获粮食。
We depend on the land that/which we get our food from. （当介词在句末时，that和which可以互换）
3．只能用that作为定语从句的关系代词的情况
（1）在there be 句型中，只用that，不用which。
Long long ago, there was a small village that was located at the foot of a mountain.
很久以前，有一个小小的村子坐落在山脚下。
（2）不定代词，如：anything, nothing, the one, all, much, few, any, little等作先行词的时候，只用that，不用which。
All that is needed is a supply of oil.
所需的只是供油问题。
Finally, the thief handed everything that he had stolen to the police.
那贼最终把偷的全部东西交给了警察。
（3）先行词有the only, the very修饰时，只用that。
The book is the only one that I can find in my house.
这本书是我在家里能够找到的唯一的书。
（4）先行词中含有序数词、数词、形容词最高级时，只用that。.
This is the best food that we can give you.
这是我们能给你们提供的最好的食物了。
This is the second time that I have told you to go away.
这已经是我第二次让你们走开了。
（5）先行词既有指人的词，又有指物的词时。
We talked about the things and persons that we remembered at that time.
我们谈论了那时我们能够记起的人和事。
【考点透视 考例精析】
[考点] 考查 like与imagine的搭配。
[考例1] The boy likes ___________ himself a flyer and he is always imagining _________ on the moon.
A． to imagine, to be B． imagining, to being
C．to imagine, being D．imagine, being
[解析] C like 既可以接一个动词不定式表示一个具体的动作，也可以接动名词，表示一个一般性的动作；但是imagine后只能接动名词，不能接不定式。所以答案为C。
[考点] 考查动词时态的用法。
[考例2] My dictionary ________, I have looked for it everywhere but still _______ it.
A．has lost, don't find
B．is missing, don't find
C．has lost, haven't found
D．Ahas lost, don't find B. is missing, don't find is missing, haven't found.
[解析]D前句是一个仍在持续的状态，应用进行时态；由于至今还没有找到，其影响仍然存在，因此第二句应用完成时，瞬间动词的否定式形式可用于完成时。
[拓展] 注意：表示“某物丢失”时，有以下几种表达方式：
My dictionary is missing/lost/gone.
[考点] 此题考查定语从句的用法。
[考例3] Alice received an invitation from her boss, ________came as a surprise.
A．it B．that C．which D．he
[解析]C此句为非限定性定语从句，不能用 that修饰，而用which.，it 和he 都使后面的句子成为独立的分句，两个独立的分句不能单以逗号连接。且选he句意不通。
[考点] 此题考查条件状语从句的时态。
【基础演练】
一、根据所给首字母或括号中的汉语意思填写句子空格中所缺的单词。
1．During the summer v____________, we went to the beach to have some leisure(休闲).
2． The poor old man was bitten by a p_________ snake and soon died.
3． She met with many difficulties during her a_____________ to the South Pole.
4． Seeing the famous film star was an u______________ experience for me.
5．She was so thirsty that she s________ a whole bottle of milk.
6． We _________ （认为） that the man standing there is his elder brother.
7． The two principal political parties have ___________(联合)to form a government.
8. The floods were a _________(灾难) in many parts of the world.
9．90% of the houses in that area were _________(毁掉) in the earthquake.
10．I'll have another ____________(机会) to visit the exhibition next year.
二、单项填空：
1．The weather turned out to be very good, _________ was more than we could expect.
A． what B． which C．that D． it
2． It rained hard yesterday, ____ prevented me from going to the park..
A． that B． which C． as D． it
3．Several weeks had gone by ___________ I realized the painting was missing.
A． as B． before C． since D． when
4． _________ you call me to say you’re not coming, I’ll see you at the theatre.
A．Though B．Whether C．Until D． Unless
5．The flowers _________ sweet in the botanic garden attract the visitors to the beauty of nature.
A．to smell B．smelling C．smell D．to be smelt
6．Now that she is out of work, Lucy _________ going back to school, but she hasn’t decided yet.
A．had considered B．has been considering
C．considered D．is going to consider
7．Alice returned from the manager’s office, _________ me that the boss wanted to see me at once.
A．having told B．tells C．to tell D．telling
8．My holiday wasn’t of much ________ to me.
A．service B．experience C．benefit D．tip
9. Was it __________ she said or something that she did ________ you were angry at so much?
A．what, that B．that, which C．that, what D．what, which
10．If there were no hungry problem, the people of the world should have ______ in their daily life.
A．a much happier time B．a more happier time
C．the happier time D．much happiest time
【能力拓展】
阅读理解：
A lawyer friend of mine has devoted herself to the service of humanity. Her special area is “public interest law”.
Many other lawyers serve only clients who can pay high fees. All lawyers have had expensive and highly specialized training, and they work long, difficult hours for the money they get. But what happens to people who need legal help and cannot pay these lawyers’ fees?
Public interest lawyers fill this need. Patricia, like other public interest lawyers, gets less money than some lawyers. Because she is willing to take less money, her clients have the help they need, even if they can pay nothing at all.
Some clients need legal help because stores have heated them with bad goods. Others are in unsafe houses. Their cases are called “civil” cases. Still others are criminals(刑事犯罪), and they go to those public interest lawyers who are in charge of “criminal” cases.
These are just a few of the many situations in which the men and women who are publie interest lawyers serve to extend justice(伸张正义) throughout our society.
1．A person who needs and uses legal help is called a _________.
A． lawyer B．client C．citizen D．judge
2. Public interest lawyers serve ___________.
A．the public only B．only stores and houses
C．people who can pay high fees D．people who can pay little or nothing
3．If only the rich could be helped by lawyers, the justice system would be ________.
A．nothing but cheating B．modern
C．fair and reasonable D．in need of no changes
4．Public interest law includes __________.
A．civil cases only B．criminal cases only
C．criminal and civil cases D．wealthy clients’ cases
5．Which of the following is NOT a matter for a civil case?
A．A tenant is turned out from a house.
B． A landlord refuses to fix a dangerous house.
C． A thief is caught by the policemen.
D．A store sells a radio which doesn’t work
参考答案
高一部分
Units 3-4 (B1)
基础演练
一、1．vacation 2．poisonous 3．adventure 4．unforgettable 5．swallowed 6．consider 7．combined 8．disaster 9．destroyed 10．opportunity
二、1-5 BBBDB 6-10 BDCAA
能力拓展
1-5 BDACC
1．B 根据第二段第一句可知，许多律师只为那些提供高额费用的client服务，由此判断出其意思。
2．D 这是一个段落大意理解题。根据第三段可得出此答案。
3．A 这是一个判断题，要求根据自己的常识去判断这句话的意思。其意思是“如果只有有钱人才能得到律师的帮助，那么这种公平制度就是骗人的了。
4．C 见文章第四段，需要帮助的案件被分成两种，即一种是所谓的civil cases，另一种是criminals。
5．C 根据第四段的内容和常识，小偷被警察抓住属于criminals，因此此选项符合题意的要求。
篇9：高一英语学案Units 5-6 (B1)(人教版高一英语教案教学设计)
【知识网络】
一、重点词汇与短语
1． take off的用法小结：
（1） take off=become successful or popular suddenly表示“突然急升，大受欢迎”的意思。
例如：
Sales of this kind of TV sets have taken off in recent weeks.
这款电视机的销售量最近几个星期上升非常快。
After this play, his career took off.
（演出）这部戏以后，他的事业（一下子）腾飞了。
（2）take off=(of plane) leave the ground and begin to fly：表示“（飞机）起飞”。例如：
The plane took off despite of the heavy rain.
尽管天在下着大雨，飞机还是起飞了。
（3）take off=remove 表示“脱去，移去”。例如：
People will take their clothes off before having a shower. 洗澡前脱衣服。
Who took the handle off the door?
是谁把把手从门上拿走的？（注意：此句中的off为介词，以上句子中的off为副词。）
（4）take off还有“在（某期间）休息、减价”的意思。例如：
I’d like to take a month off. 我想休一个月的假。
They are taking 50% off all goods in that shop.
那家商店的所有商品打五折。
2．go: 作为系动词的用法：
作为系动词go常常表示不好的变化。如go mad/bad/blind/hungry/red/wrong等等。
例如：
Fish goes bad easily in summer.
夏天鱼很容易变质。
After that terrible experience, he went mad.
那次可怕的经历以后，他疯掉了。
He went red with anger because of what he saw there.
在那里看到的东西气得他脸都红了。
The machines that we bought yesterday went wrong.
我们昨天买的机器出故障了。
拓展：
（1）作为系动词，turn也可以在后面接形容词做表语，但它经常表示“从某种状态向其对应的状态变化的自然现象”。例如：
The weather has turned much warmer.
天已经变得温暖多了。
注意：turn后面还可以接名词的原形作表语。例如：
That poor boy turned writer twenty years later.
二十年后，那个穷孩子成为一名作家。
（2）become作为系动词使用时，强调变化过程的持续性。例如：
Gradually the boy became silent.
那个男孩渐渐变得沉默寡言了。
注意：become后也可以接名词作表语，但它后面的名词为普通用法。例如：
That poor boy became a writer twenty years later.
二十年后，那个穷孩子成为一名作家。
You will become a college student if you study hard.
如果努力学习，你会成为一名大学生的。
（3）get作为系动词使用时，强调事件的施动者的作用或变化的结果。例如：
Hearing that, he got excited.
听到这件事，他激动起来。
（4）come大都表示向好的方面变化。例如：
His dream came true after years of hard work.
经过多年的辛苦工作，他的梦想实现了。
二、词义辨析
1． reason, cause与excuse的区别：
cause, reason与excuse这组同义词的一般含义是“原因”或“理由”
（1）cause用于表示具有明显因果关系的原因，是某一结果的“起因”；reason有时能与cause换用，但上下文必须有能够查得出的或可以解释得出的因果关系，表示“导致某种结果/做出某种行为的理由”。如果某“结果”是不言而喻的，也可以用reason表示“原因”。
例如：
Was the noise a cause of the illness, or were the complaints about noise merely a symptom?
噪音是病因呢，还是对噪音的抱怨仅仅是一种症状呢？
Every effect must have an adequate cause.
每一种结果都必须有充分的原因。
They are trying to find out the reason (or cause) of the terrible fire.
他们正在努力查寻那次可怕的火灾的原因。
The airport was built during the war, but for some reason it could not be used then.
这个飞机场是在大战期间建造的，但是由于某种原因当时没有能够使用。
The reason for this is that this plane is also a bicycle.
其原因是，这架飞机又是一辆自行车。
（2）excuse指“（为免受指责和推卸责任而找到的）理由，借口”。例如：
Too much work is no excuse for not studying.
工作太忙不能成为不学习的理由。
Have you any excuse to offer for frequent absence from collective practice?
你经常不参加集体训练有什么理由解释吗?
“I will not listen to any excuse,” Mr. Black stopped her.
“我不想听任何借口。”布莱克先生阻止她说。
（3）cause还可以作为动词使用，意思是“引起；使；促成”。例如：
The heavy rain caused the flood. 大雨引起了洪水。
The wound isn't serious, but may cause some discomfort.
伤口并不严重,但可能会引起一些不舒适。
（4）excuse 可以作为动词，常与for连用。意思是“宽恕；原谅；辩解；开脱”。例如：
Please excuse me. 请原谅。
Please excuse me for being late. 对不起，我迟到了。
She said 'Excuse me' when she stepped on my foot.
她踩了我的脚时说了声'对不起'。
Nothing will excuse his cruelty to his children.
任何事都不能开脱他虐待儿童的罪行。
2．live, alive, living, lively的区别：
这几个词都与“活“有关，其区别如下：
（1）live作为形容词，意思是“活的，有生命的，现场直播的”。表示“现场直播”还可以作为副词使用。表示“活的，有生命的”，主要作定语；常用来修饰物，不能指人。
例如：
There is a live fish in the basket. 篮子里有一条活鱼。
It was not a recorded show; it was live.
”那不是录音节目,是实况转播。“
That program is broadcast live.
那个节目是现场直播的。
（2）alive: 通常作表语、宾语补足语或后置定语，意思是“活的，有生命的”。
例如：
The fish we caught is still alive. 我们捉的鱼还活着。
In most cases, both parents were still alive and still married to each other.
大多数情况下,他们的父母都还活着,而且仍然保持着婚姻关系。
（3）living：通常作表语或者前置定语，意思是“活着的，有生命的；逼真的”。
例如：
The living are more important to us than the dead. （注意：the+adj.此处等于名词，指“在世的人”） 对我们来说在世的人比去世的人更重要。
She has no living relatives.
她没有还健在的亲戚。
She is the living image of her young mother.
她活像她母亲年青时的样子。
The old lady is still living at the age of 108.
那位老太太已经108岁，仍然健在。
（4）lively：意思是“活泼的；生气勃勃的”。常作前置定语和表语。
例如：
A lively person is full of life and is always doing things.
一个生气勃勃的人，总是充满活力并且总在做事。
Children usually have a lively imagination.
儿童们往往有丰富的想像力。
三、重点句型
1．When asked about the secret of his success, Steven Spielberg said that he owes much of his success and happiness to his wife and children.
此句中，when引导的时间状语也是由从句省略而成的；另外，somebody owe something to somebody是一个重要词组，意思是“把某事归功于某人”。例如：
I owe my success to Mr. Zhao. 我把成功归功于赵先生。
2．She becomes very worried and determined to bring Huike back safely.
动词determine后面可以接不定式，表示“决定做某事”；我们还可以用determine的过去分词作动词使用，构成短语be determined to do something，意思也是“决定做某事”。但是，前者强调动作而后者强调状态。
例如：
They were all determined to go there the next Sunday.
他们决定下个星期日到那里去。
3．Having good table manners means knowing, for example, how to use knives and forks, when to drink a toast and how to behave at the table.
此句中包含有两个动词的-ing形式，第一个“having good table manners”作主语；第二个“knowing, for example, how to use …”作宾语。
四、语法复习
定语从句复习第二部分：
1．关系副词可代替的先行词是表示时间、地点或理由的词，在从句中作状语。
（1）关系副词when, where, why的含义相当于”介词+ which“结构，因此常常和”介词+ which“结构交替使用。
例如：
There are occasions when (on which) one must give in. 任何人都有不得不屈服的时候。
Shandong is the place where (in which) I was born. 山东是我的出生地。
Is this the reason why (for which) they didn’t come ? 这就是他们不来的理由吗？
（2） that可以用于表示时间、地点、方式、理由的名词后面，取代when, where, why和”介词+ which“引导的定语从句，在口语中that常被省略，
例如：
His father died the year (that / when / in which) he was born. 他父亲在他出生那年逝世了。
He is unlikely to find the place (that / where / in which) he lived twenty years ago. 他不大可能找到他二十年前居住过的地方。
（3）在“介词+关系代词”引导的定语从句中，选择介词一般依据以下几个原则：
①根据先行词来选择介词。例如：
The pencil with which I wrote my homework was very long.
我用来写作业的那支铅笔很长。
②根据从句的动词来选择介词。例如：
The girl to whom you spoke at the lecture hall yesterday is the most beautiful girl in our class（speak与to搭配，表示“给某人说话”）
昨天在讲座厅你给她说话的那个女孩是我们班最漂亮的。
③根据意义来选择介词。例如：
He made a telescope, through which he could study the skies.
他做了一架望远镜，通过这架望远镜他能够研究天空。
My glasses, without which I was almost blind, fell to the ground and broke.
我的眼镜掉在地上摔碎了，没有眼镜我几乎什么都看不见。
2．定语从句有限制性和非限制性两种。限制性定语从句是主句不可缺少的部分，不可以去掉；非限制性定语从句是对主句的附加说明，去掉了也不会影响主句的意思，它与主句之间通常用逗号分开，
例如：
This is the car which we bought last month.
这是我们上个月买的那辆车。（限制性定语从句，不可省略）
He was the only person who/that could unlock the door.
他是唯一一个能够打开那扇门的人。（限制性定语从句，不可省略）
The house, which we bought last year, is very large.这幢房子面积很大，是我们去年买的。（非限制性定语从句，可以省略）
3．由as, which 引导的非限定性定语从句，as和which可以代整个主句。在句中可以作主语、宾语、或者表语，二者经常可以互换；但as可以放在句首或者插入句中、放在句尾，which只能放在句尾。
例如：
She failed in the exam, which/as was natural.
她考试不及格，这很自然。
As we know, the earth goes around the sun.
正如我们都知道的，地球围绕着太阳运转。
The sun heats the earth, which is very important to us.
太阳给地球热量，这一点对于我们非常重要。
Mr. Zhang, as we all know, is an honest person.
正如我们大家都知道的，张先生是个老实人。
特别注意：as 和which在引导非限制性定语从句时，这两个关系代词都可以指主句所表达的整个意思，且在定语从句中都可以作主语和宾语。但不同之处主要有两点：
（1） as 引导的定语从句可置于句首，而which不可。 例如：
As we can see, oceans cover more than 70 percent of the earth.（as在从句中作宾语）
正如我们可以看到的，海洋覆盖了地球的百分之七十以上。
（2） as 代表前面的整个主句并在从句中作主语时，从句中的谓语经常用行为动词的被动语态形式；若为行为动词的主动语态，则从句中的关系代词只能用which.。
例如：
As is expected, they arrived on time.
正如所预料到的，他们按时到达了。
They are hollow, which makes them very light. （从句的谓语动词为makes，所以只能用which。）它们是中空的，这一点使得它们的重量很轻。
（3）as常和动词expect, see, say, hope, happen, know等连用。当从句和主句语义一致时，as常翻译成“正如”。
例如：
As often happens, he is late again.
正如经常发生的，他又迟到了。
The Great Wall, as is well-known, is one of the wonders in the world.
众所周知/正如大家都知道的，长城是世界上的奇迹之一。
（4）注意：as与the same, such 等连用时，引导的定语从句不是代表整个主句。例如：
Such people as you described just now are common these days.= People such as you described just now are common these days.
像你刚才描述的那种人这些日子很常见。
They have the same problems as you do.
他们遇到了和你们相同的问题。
4．关系副词和人称代词、指示代词的区别：
在高考中，经常把关系代词和人称代词、指示代词一起安排在选项里面。要做对这些题目，就必须从分析句子结构入手。如果两句之间有逗号隔开而且没有其它连词，就要选关系代词；如果第二个分句中有连词，两句之间有分号或者句号，则是并列句，就应该选人称代词或者指示代词。
例如：
It was carved in rock and had on the outside four large statues, each of which was 20 meters high.
It was carved in rock and had on the outside four large statues and each of them was 20 meters high.
它是被雕刻在岩石上的，在它表面有四个大石头雕像，每个都高达20米。
【考点透视 考例精析】
[考点] 考查定语从句引导词的选择。
[考例1] The film brought the hours back to me ___________ I was taken care of in that far-away village. (NMET)
A．until B．that C．when D．where
[解析]C本句的意思是“这部电影把我带回到我在那个偏远的村子里由别人照顾的日子里。”空格里应该选择关系副词when，它引导定语从句修饰hours，同时when在从句中作时间状语。
[考点] 考查序数词前的冠词用法。
[考例2] The cakes are delicious. He’d like to have _______ third one because ________ second one is rather too small.
A．a, a B．the, the C．a, the D．the, a
[解析]C序数词前使用不定冠词表示“又一个，再一个”的意思，相当于another，不是强调顺序的，而定冠词放在序数词前强调顺序。
[拓展] 序数词前选用冠词问题是一个常考到的类型。不定冠词表示“在原提到的数量基础上的又一个，另一个”，翻译时要注意。再如：
He has tried three times but failed, but he has decided to try a fourth time.
他已经试验过三次都失败了，但是他决定要再试一次。
[考点]考查具体语境中动词的选择。
[考例3] --Will you go to study in Australia next fall?
--No, I can not __________ the right cost.
A．spare B．share C．spend D．afford
[解析] D本题中的四个动词的含义及用法各不相同。Spare表示“节省”；share表示“分享”；spend表示“花费”；而afford表示“花费得起，付得起”。只有D项符合题意：“我付不起相关费用”。注意：afford常与can/could连用。
【基础演练】
一、据所给首字母或括号中的汉语意思填写句子空格中所缺的单词。
1． He is one of the d__________ of the famous film.
2．She had to make a c__________ between the two dresses.
3．I've received a gift from him, but I'm not going to a__________ it.
4． What were your first i_________ of London?
5．Traffic in the city was i__________ by a snowstorm.
6．Because of his father’s help, he succeeded in his __________(职业)。
7．But when ____________(工业) became more important than agriculture in American life, families became smaller.
8．The little boy _________（表现）with great courage in the face of the gunman.
9．He made a _________ (评价) about the bad road.
10．Deaf people and dumb people are _________（残疾的）too.
二、单项填空：
1．Though Mr. Smith has tried many ways, he still __________ a job in the city.
A．failed finding B．failed to find C．missed to find D．lost to find
2．When the village ___________ storm, my friends were staying in it, which made me feel worried.
A．was beaten of B．was attacked with
C．was knocked on D．was hit by
3．Nobody believed his reason for being absent from the class was ______ he had to meet his uncle at the air port. [06 重庆卷]
A．why B．that C．where D．because
4．Do you know the boy __________ under the big tree?
A．lay B．lain C．laying D．lying
5．Do you still remember the chicken farm _______ we visited three months ago? (NMET, 春季北京)
A．where B．when C．hat D．what
6．The journey around the world took the old sailor nine months, _________ the sailing time was 226 days. (NMET 全国卷I，28)
A．of which B．during which C．from which D． for which
7．It was an exciting moment for these football fans this year, ________ for the first time in years their team won the World Cup. (NMET, 春季北京)
A．that B．while C．which D．when
8．Recently I bought an ancient Chinese vase, _________ was very reasonable. (上海，28)
A．which price B．the price of which
C．its price D．the price of whose
9．The wrong you’ve done him is terrible, ________ you should make an apology to him, I think.
A． to which B．for which C．to what D．for that
10．--Can you tell me where he once lived?
--Oh, it’s the very house __________ you have just visited.
A．what B．that C．where D．in which
【能力拓展】
You might not know it, but there is something wonderful at your fingertips. You can make people happier, healthier and more hard-working just by touching their arms or holding their hands.
Doctors say that body touch is a kind of medicine that can work wonders. When people are touched, the quantity of hemoglobin--a type of matter that produces the red color in blood--increases greatly. This results in more oxygen reaching every part of the body and the whole body benefits. In experiments, bottle-fed baby monkeys were separated from their mothers for the first ten days of life. They became sad and inactive. Studies showed the monkeys were more probable to become ill than other babies that were allowed to stay with their mothers.
Human babies react in much the same way. Some years ago, a scientist noticed that some well-fed babies in a clean nursery became weak. Yet babies in another nursery were growing healthily, even though they ate less well and were not kept as clean. The reason, he concluded, was that they often had touches from nurses.
Experiments show that most people like being touched. And nearly all doctors believe touch helps to reduce patients’ fear of treatment. Of course there is time when a touch is not welcome. But even if we don't like being touched, a smile can make us feel better. Smiling increases blood flow and starts the production of ”happy brain“ chemicals.
So let's have a big smile and don't forget to keep ”in touch“.
1．Which of the following is NOT true according to the passage?
A．Everyone knows that body contact can make people happier.
B．People may work harder because of body contact.
C．Your fingertips can do something wonderful.
D．People may not understand the importance of touching.
2．According to the passage, _________.
A．human brains need oxygen and blood supply now and then
B．touches from doctors and nurses have nothing to do with treatment
C．new-born baby monkeys should stay away from their mothers
D．not all people like being touched
3．The underlined word ”benefits” in the second paragraph probably means“_____”.
A．becomes useful or helpful B．gets something useful or helpful
C．falls ill D．gets hurt
4．What would be the best title for the passage?
A．Comfortable Touch B．Smile
C．Wonders of Touch D．Keep in Touch
参考答案
高一部分
Units 5-6 (B1)
基础演练
一、1． directors 2．choice 3．accept 4．impression 5．interrupted 6．career
7．industry 8．behaved 9．comment 10． disabled
二、1-5 BDBDC 6-10 ADBBB
能力拓展
1-4 ADBC
1．A 这是一个全文理解题。根据文章的意思，并非每个人都明白这个道理。
2．D 倒数第二段主要讨论了这个问题。大多数人喜欢，但并非所有人都喜欢。
3．B 这是一个根据上下文猜测意思的题目。根据文章的意思，就是“对…有益处/有好处”。
4．C 这是一个判断文章标题的题目，答案从全文得出。
篇10：高一英语学案Units 1-2 (B1)(人教版高一英语教案教学设计)
【知识网络】
一、重点词汇与短语
1．argue的用法小结：
（1）argue可以作及物动词和不及物动词，意思是“辩论,争论；争吵”。常用结构是“argue with somebody about/over something”，表示“和某人就某事进行辩论”。
例如：
argue a case：辩论一个案子
They argued their actions had nothing to do with the riot, but I think that's debatable.
他们辩解道,他们的行为与这次骚乱没有关系,但我认为这话未必正确。
He argued with Mary about/over the best place for a holiday.
他和玛丽争论度假的最好地方。
（2）argue 还可以用于以下搭配：
argue for something ：赞成某事
argue against something ：反对某事
argue somebody into/out of doing something：说服某人做/不做某事
He argued for the plan. 它赞成这个计划。
They strongly argue against going there next Sunday.
他们坚决反对下星期天去那儿。
We argued him out of doing such a stupid thing.
我们说服了他没有做这件蠢事。
2．survive 的用法小结：
（1）survive表示“大难不死；死里逃生;在…之后还活着”的意思。经常用于词组survive from something或者survive on something。
Many strange customs have survived from earlier time.
许多奇怪的习俗是从很早以前流传下来的。
They can survive on very little money.
他们用很少的钱就可以生存。
The man was very ill, but he survived.
这个人病得很厉害，可是他活下来了。
（2）survive作动词，还可以表示“幸存，幸免于”，也可以表示“比…长寿”。例如：These plants cannot survive in very cold conditions.
这些植物在非常寒冷的条件下无法存活。
Few survived after the flood.
洪水过后，生还者极少。
3．share的用法小结：
（1）share可以作为名词使用，意思是“属于或由某人做的部分，一份；股份；股票”。例如：
We gave each of the five children an equal share.
我们给了这五个孩子每人均等的一份。
Do not part with the shares on any account. 无论如何不要放弃这些股票。
They sell shares in companies at the stock exchange.
他们在证券交易所出售公司股票。
Note: share在表示“（以股票形式买卖的）股权”这个意思时，常用复数形式。
例如：
go shares：平分；均摊
（2）share用作动词时，既可以作及物动词，也可以作不及物动词。过去式和过去分词都是shared，属于规则动词。它常与in连用，意思是“共用；分摊；共有；参与”；与out连用，意思是“分配”；与with连用，意思是“告诉别人”。
例如：
We shared the sweets. 我们分吃了糖果。
They share their joys and sorrows. 他们同甘共苦。
Bill and Bob shared the work equally between them. 比尔和鲍勃两人把工作平分了。
He shared the story with us. 他给我们讲了这个故事。
（3）常用习语：
share and share alike：平均分配；有相同的等份
bear/take one’s share of …：负担……的部分
for my share：至于我自己
fall to somebody’s share：由某人分担；归某人享有
go shares (with)…：平分，分享，均摊
have/take one’s share：分担，参加
one’s share of the cake：分享的一份好处；应得的一份
二、词义辨析
1．specially与especially的区别:这两个词都有“特别、专门”的意思。
（1）specially指的是非一般、非正常、非广泛。表示为某一特定目的而做某事，经常翻译成“专门”。
例如：
I came here specially to ask you a question. 我是专门来问你一个问题的。
”Bluebird, the car he was driving, had been specially built for him.“
他所驾驶的汽车是为他特制的`蓝鸟'。
Specially-made lanterns are hung outside each house to help the dead to find their way.
”家家户户都挂着特制的灯笼,以帮助死者认路。“
He is not specially clever，but he works hard.
他不是特别聪明，但他工作很努力。
（2）especially的特殊、特别指的是非普通、非寻常、程度上超过其他的。常常翻译成“尤其，特别地”，修饰形容词、副词或者动词，表示某种情况与平常很不一样。例如：
I love Italy, especially in summer. 我喜欢意大利，尤其是在夏天。
There is one part of the country with an especially large Indian population. That is the southwest.
”美国有一个区域的印第安人特别多,那就是美国西南部。“
”People, especially youngsters don't seem so polite these days.“
”如今人们,尤其是年青人好象不那么讲礼貌了。“
”'Do you like chocolate?' 'Not, especially.'“ '你喜欢吃巧克力吗?''不是特别喜欢。'
（3）specially与 especially在数量、程度等方面表示“例外、格外、过分”的意思时一般可以互换。口语中，一般用specially, 正式文件中多用especially，特别是在介词或者连词前面尤为多见。例如：
It’s not specially/especially hot today.
今天不算特别热。
2． question, problem, trouble, matter的区别：
这四个名词都可以翻译成“问题”，question指主观存在的“疑惑、疑问”，所以是需要“回答（answer）的”；problem指客观存在的和遇到的疑难问题，有时指较严重的问题，所以是需要“解决（solve，work out）的”；trouble指遇到的“麻烦、问题”，指存在并有点棘手的问题；matter表示“事情，麻烦”，指具有某种特征的事例。例如：
You haven't answered my question. 你还没有回答我的问题。
His honesty is beyond question. 他的诚实无可怀疑。
a key problem： 一个关键问题
The problem was how to move the heavy machinery.
问题是怎样移动这台沉重的机器。
They are discussing how to solve the problem.
他们正在讨论如何解决这个问题。
The boy caused a lot of trouble to his parents；he was always in trouble.
这个男孩给他的父母招来很多麻烦，他甚为苦恼。
Students growing up from nursery school to college have trouble dealing with realities.
从幼儿园到大学的大学生在如何应付现实生活上都存在困难。
Trouble seems to be developing both in the cities and in the villages.
城市和农村好象都在酝酿着麻烦的事端。
This is a matter of no account. 这是一件无关紧要的事。
I can't see the visitors right now. I have an urgent matter to attend to.
现在我不能接见客人,因为我有一件急事要办。
It is still a serious matter that some people drive after having drunk.
一些人酒后驾车仍然是一个严重的问题。
3．besides, except, except for 与but的区别：
这四个介词或者短语都可以表示“除了…”的意思。但except仅表示“除了…”，排除在外，后面可以接that，what，when等引导的从句；而besides表示“除了…还有…”的意思，表示包含在内；except for表示“除了…”，它引出一个与前面的词相反的原因或者事例；but的意思与except接近，它主要与某些不定代词如nothing，all, anything， no one，anyone连用。
例如：
”Except for one old lady, the bus was empty.“
公共汽车上要不是坐了一位老太太就是空的。
She can do everything except cook.
除了做饭之外她什么都会。
He had considered everything except the weather.
”他什么都想过,唯独没考虑到天气。“
I know nothing about it except what I have read in the papers.
”除了在报上读到的以外,我对这件事一无所知。“
Most of the Chinese people usually go to work on the bike except when it rains.
”除了雨天,大多数中国人一般都骑自行车上班。“
Besides milk and cheese, we need vegetables.
除了牛奶和干酪外，我们还需要蔬菜。
Besides football, I like playing basketball and table tennis.
除了足球以外，我还喜欢打篮球和乒乓球。
No one but me passed the exam yesterday.
昨天除了我以外没别人考及格。
Nobody but Li Ming talked to Lao Wang today.
除了李明，今天没有人给老王说话。
三、重点句型
1. I don’t enjoy singing, nor do I like computers.
此句要注意的是表示否定意义的nor引导一个倒装句。 再如：
I don’t know how to play computer games, nor do I care.
我不知道怎样打电脑游戏，我也不在乎。
表示上一句的情况也适合下一句时，还可以用“so”表示肯定意义。例如：
I work in a very big factory, so does he. 我在一个大工厂上班，他也是。
2．Despite the fact that they have never met each other, Michael and Xiao Li are best friends.
此句中的that引导的是一个同位语从句，that在这类句子中不作成分。同样，that还可以在名词idea, plan, suggestion等词的后面引导同位语从句。再如：
The idea that we go there by bus is acceptable because it is very far from here to the city.
我们坐车去那里的想法是可以接受的，因为从这里到城里很远。
3．With so many people communicating in English every day, it will become more and more important to have a good knowledge of English.
在英语中，with复合结构是一个常用结构，常用来作定语、状语等等。此句中的with复合结构作状语。
再如：
The poor girl, with a basket on her back, search all day from the foot of the mountain to the top of it.
四、语法复习: 直接引语与间接引语：
直接引语变为间接引语时，要从以下几个方面考虑：
1．句式的转变：
①当直接引语为陈述句时，间接引语变为由that引导的宾语从句。
例如：
“I like doing my homework in the evening,” said George.
--George said that he liked doing his homework in the evening.
②当直接引语为一般疑问句时，就将其变为由if/whether引导的宾语从句,动词由say变为ask。
例如：
“Mary, have you seen Tom this morning?” Peter said to me.
--Peter asked me whether/if I had seen Tom that morning.
③当直接引语为特殊疑问句时，就将其变为以这个特殊疑问词为连接词引导的宾语从句。
例如：
“What are they doing over there?” asked John.
--John asked what they were doing over there.
④当直接引语为祈使句时，就将其变成动词不定式形式;同时还要注意把say改为可以接动词不定式作宾语补足语的动词，如tell, ask, order, advise等等。
例如：
“Go there at once,” Father said to me just now.
--Father ordered me to go there at once just now.
2．人称的改变。变成间接引语的句子前后人称要一致。
例如：
“Your bike is more beautiful than mine.” she said to me.
--She said that my bike was more beautiful than hers.
3．谓语动词时态的改变：当主句的谓语动词为一般现在时态时，从句可以根据需要使用不同的时态，也就是说，原来直接引语的时态大多不需要改变，而当主句用一般过去时态时，从句要用表示过去范畴的时态。
例如：
“Come here again next month,” he is saying to us.
--He is telling us to come here again next month.
注意：如果直接引语的谓语动词为一般现在时态，而内容又是客观事实、科学真理、现在的习惯动作以及格言等时，间接引语保持原来的时态不变。
例如：
The teacher said to us,” The earth goes around the sun.”
--The teacher told us that the earth goes around the sun.
4．根据句子的意思，句中的指示代词、地点以及时间状语等也要作必要的变动。
例如：
“Come here,” the police officer said to the driver.
--The police officer told the driver to go there.
【考点透视 考例精析】
[考点] 考查动词的-ing形式与-ed分词的用法。
[考例1] The old man felt _______________ he couldn’t say a word but cried with his body shaking at the airport.
A．so excited that B．so exciting that C．oo excited to D．enough exciting to
[解析] 选A．从对句子的结构分析我们可以看出这是一个复合句，因此用so …that连接。Excited表示“某人对某事感到激动”，所以其主语多用指人的词；而exciting表示“某事令某人激动的”，因而主语多用指物的词。本句的意思是“那位老人感到非常激动，他在飞机场颤动着身体大哭起来，一句话都说不出来。”因此答案选A。
[考点] 考查动词need to do与need doing/to be done的用法。
[考例2]The teachers___________ change their forms of practice, and sometimes some practice ________ as well.
A．need, needs changing B．need, needs to change
C．need to, need to change D．need to, needs changing
[解析]选D．由指人的词作主语，表示“需要做某事”的时候，应该使用句型“need to do something”；如果要表示“某事需要（被）做”，那就一般用指物的词作主语，使用句型“something need doing/to be done”。
[考点]本题考查动词trade的用法以及not at all 与not a little的意义区别。
[考例3] Mr. Robert doesn’t like to _________ with Arabs _____________ just because he used to be hurt five years ago.
A．trade, at all B．business, not a bit
C．trade, a little D．do business, not a little
[解析] 选A．“trade…with 与do business with”意思都是“与某人做买卖、交往”。Not at all 与not a bit都表示“一点也不”；但是，not a little表示“不止一点，非常，相当”的意思，相当于very的意思。所以，根据句子的意思，应该选A。
[拓展] not a bit与not a little这两个词组的意思要引起特别的重视，因为它们的肯定意思相同，而否定结构意思相差非常大。另外还要注意这两个词组的肯定式后面接名词时也是有区别的。a bit后要先接of再接名词；而a little后可以直接接名词。例如：
There is only a little ink in the bottle.
There is only a bit of ink in the bottle.
[考点] need作情态动词与作行为动词的区别。
[考例4] In fact you ______________ argue with anyone, just making yourself happy in your office.
A．need not to B．didn’t need to C．mustn’t D．can’t
[解析] 选B．need既可以作情态动词也可以作行为动词。作为情态动词使用时，其后面直接接动词原形，否定的结构是直接在其后接not，而且无第三人称单数形式；用作行为动词时，变成否定句和疑问句要遵循其它行为动词的规则，即加上助动词do, does, did等等。
【基础演练】
一、根据所给首字母或括号中的汉语意思填写句子空格中所缺的单词。
1．You can spell the word “understand”, but can you p___________ it?
2．Pardon? Could you r_________ the question?
3．You can c__________ this TV set carefully with the other one to find which is better.
4．Although she is young, she is very i__________. She seldom relies on others to decide.
5．After the father retired, the youngest son r_____________ him as president of the company.
6．All the children listened to his ____________(冒险经历) with eager attention.
7．He ________________(争论) with Mary about the best place for a holiday yesterday.
8．The president has already _________________(沟通) on this event with the general manager.
9．When will the new novel be ______________(出版)?
10．Only with ____________（组织）can the wisdom of the collective be given full play.
二、单项填空：
1．It’s said that the weather will _________ hot for another three or four days.
A．look B．last C．stay D．get
2． I have to go to work by taxi because my car ______ at the garage. [06 重庆卷]
A．will be repaired B．is repaired C．is being repaired D．has been repaired
3．I telephoned him twice and I couldn’t get through to his house. The line must have been out of order, _______________?
A．doesn’t it B．mustn’t it C．wasn’t it D．hadn’t it
4．__________ is the kindness of the nurse that the patient can never be __________ to her.
A．So, too thankful B．Such, so thankful
C．So, that thankful D．Such, thankful enough
5． ________ two exams to worry about, I have to work really hard this weekend.
A．Besides B．With C．As for D．Because of
6．All morning as she waited for the medical report from the window, her nervousness _________.
A．is growing B．has grown C．grew D．had grown
7．The old couple have been married for 40 years and never once _________ with each other.
A．they had quarreled B．hey have quarreled
C．have they quarreled D．had they quarreled
8．In this experiment, they are waken up several times during the night, and asked to report what they ____________.
A．had just been dreaming B．are just dreaming
C．have just been dreaming D．had just dreamt
9．Tom ought not to _________ me your secret, but he meant no harm.
A．have told B．tell C．be telling D．having told
10．--English has a large vocabulary, hasn’t it?
--Yes. _________ more words and expressions and you will find it easier to read and communicate.
A．Know B．Knowing C．To know D．Known
【能力拓展】
阅读理解：
Many American presidents in the 19th century were born in poor families. They spent their childhood in little wooden rooms. They got little education. Washington and Lincoln, for example, never went to school and they taught themselves. Lincoln once did jobs for a worker, shop-keeper and post-master in his early years.
A large number of American presidents had experiences in the army. The two best known were Ulysses Grant and Dwight D. Eisenhower. Grant was a general in the American Civil War and Eisenhower was hero in the Second World War. It happened that they graduated from the same school--West Point Military Academy(西点军校).One may be surprised to learn that both of them didn't do well in the school. Eisenhower, for example, was once fined(punished to pay money) because he broke the rules of the school.
The jobs of the U.S. presidents are tiring. He must keep an eye on anything important that happens both at home and abroad. Every day, a lot of work waits for him to do and he has to make many important decisions. When Franklin Roosevelt was a child, he was once brought to visit President Taft. The old president said to him,” When you grow up, you should not be president. It's a tiring job.“
1． How many American presidents are mentioned in this passage?
A．4 B．5 C．6 D．7
2．Who regard the jobs of the U.S. presidents as the tiring ones?
A．Grant B．Taft C．Eisenhower D．Roosevelt
3．In this passage, ”keep an eye on“ means _______.
A．take care of B．see C．look at fixedly D．stare at
4．The second paragraph mainly tells us ______.
A．that Eisenhower became famous in the Second World War
B．how Grant became a general
C．that Grant and Eisenhower were both schoolmates
D．that many of the U.S. presidents had served in the army
5．Which of the following is true?
A．F. Roosevelt was one of the U.S. presidents before Grant
B．Lincoln was elected the U.S. president after Grant
C．West Point Military Academy was founded in the Second World War
D．Washington was born in a very poor family
参考答案
高一部分
Units 1-2 (B1)
基础演练
一、1． pronounce 2．repeat 3．compare 4．independent 5．replaced 6．adventures 7．argued 8．communicated 9．published 10．organization
二、1-5 CCCDB 6-10 CCCAA
能力拓展
1-5 CBADD
1．C 从文章所提到的姓名中可以算出来。
2．B 最后一段的最后，从上下文可以判断出来。“When Franklin Roosevelt was a child, he was once brought to visit President Taft. The old president said…”
3．A 根据文章内容猜测这个词组的意思，应为“关注”。
4．D归纳第二段的段意可以得出此答案。
5．D 根据全文意思判断正误。
篇11：高一英语学案Units 9-10 (B1)(人教版高一英语教案教学设计)
【知识网络】
一、重点词汇与短语
1．add用法小结：
（1）的基本意思是“增加、添加，加上”，一般作及物动词，后接名词、数词等作宾语。例如：
Add more hot water to the soup – it is too salty. 在汤里多加点热水 – 太咸了。
Add a few more names of laborers to the list.
名单上再加上几个工人的名字。
（2）表示“加；加起来”的意思。
例如：
If you add 4 to 3， you get 7. 四加三得七。
Add up these figures, please. 请把这些数字加起来。
（3）表示“补充说； 又说”。
例如：
I should add that we are very pleased. 我要补充的是我们非常高兴。
I should like to add that we are pleased with the test result.
我还要补充说一下,我们对测试结果表示满意。
（4）常用短语：
●add something to something: add fuel to the fire: 火上浇油
●add up/together: 加算；合计He wrote down the weight of each stone and then added up/together all the weights.
他把每一块石头的重量记下来，然后把所有的重量加在一起。
The various facts in their report just don't add up.
他们报告中的各方面材料根本串不起来。
●add to: 增加
Our coming added to your trouble. 我们的到来给你们增加了麻烦。
●add up to：总计达到…，总和为…，总数达…：
His debts added up to 40,000 dollars. 他的债务总计达到40，000美圆。
2．remind用法小结：remind作为及物动词，常与of, to infinitive, that连用，意思是“使想起；使记起；提醒”。
例如：
Remind me to write to Mother. (后接somebody to do something )
提醒我给妈妈写信。
This reminds me of last year. (后接somebody + of + something)
这使我想起去年的事。
In case I forget, please remind me about it. （后接somebody + about + something）
请提醒我一下，以免我忘记。
He reminded me that I had done it before. （后接that从句）
他使我想起我以前做过了。
3．wonder用法小结：
（1）wonder既可以作及物动词，也可以作不及物动词使用。常与at, that连用，意思是“觉得奇怪；惊奇；纳闷；想知道”。
例如：
I wonder. In England, each man speaks a different language.
我感到十分惊奇,在英国每个人都说着一种语言。
I wonder at his rudeness. 我对他的粗鲁感到奇怪。
He wondered why people built ugly homes, when they could have beautiful ones.
他很奇怪为什么人们本可以造出漂亮的房屋,而偏偏建造出丑陋的房子来。
He was just wondering how to do it. 他只是想知道怎么做这个。
Ted wondered why he was wanted by the police, but he went to the station yesterday.
特德不知道为什么警察局要他去,但昨天他去了。
I wonder why James is always late for school.
我想知道为什么詹姆斯上学总是迟到。
（2）wonder还可以作名词，意思是“惊奇；惊叹；奇观；壮举；奇才”。
例如：
The boy looked at the stranger in wonder.
那个男孩惊奇地看着那个陌生人。
They were filled with wonder when they saw the spaceship.
当他们看到宇宙飞船时，他们非常惊奇。
He has visited the seven wonders of the world. 世界七大奇观他都参观过了。
He's a wonder. 他是个奇才。
（3）习惯用语：
● It's a wonder：难得；奇怪的是
It's a wonder you recognized me. 难得你还认得我。
● (It's) no wonder 难怪；并不奇怪；当然
No wonder he is not hungry; he has been eating sweets all day.
难怪他不饿，他整天在吃糖果。
二、词义辨析
1．last, latest 与newest的区别：
（1）last表示“最后的，刚刚过去的；紧接前面的”，强调顺序。
例如：
She was the last to arrive. 她是最后到的。
He was the very last to leave the office. 他是最后一个离开办公室的。
He would be the last man to do such foolish things. 他决不会干这种蠢事。
He won the last election. 上次选举他获胜了。
（2）latest意思是“最新的，最晚的，最近的”。
例如：
Everyone wants to read the latest news, no one wants yesterday’s newspaper.
人人都想读到最新的消息，没有人想要读昨天的报纸。
（3）newest表示“最新的”，它是与旧“old”相对的。
例如：
The man put on his newest clothes to attend the party.
那个人穿上最新的衣服去参加晚会。
2．whatever 与no matter what的区别：
两者都表示“无论什么，”但是在用法上有所区别：whatever既可以引导让步状语从句，又可以引导名词性从句；而no matter what只能引导让步状语从句。
例如：
No matter what you say, I’ll still do it alone. （让步状语从句）
=Whatever you say, I’ll still do it alone. （让步状语从句）
无论你们说什么，我还是要自己做这件事。
Whatever we said, he'd disagree. （让步状语从句）
College students are seen doing whatever work they can find. （宾语从句）
我们可以看到,只要有工作,大学生们什么都干。
Do whatever she tells you and you'll have peace. （宾语从句）
她叫你干什么你就干什么,那你就太平了。
Whatever happens, the first important thing is to keep cool. （让步状语从句）
不管发生什么事,头等重要的是保持冷静。
You may do whatever you want to do. （宾语从句）
无论你想做什么事，你都可以做。
Whatever we do is our own business. （主语从句）
无论我们做什么，那是我们自己的事。
三、重点句型
1．Cellphones, or mobile phones, make it possible for us to talk to anyone from anywhere.
此句中，动词make为使役动词，后面接复合宾语，此句的it为形式宾语。
再如：
We found it important to complete our task on time.
我们发现按时完成任务很重要。
2．I don’t dare to use the phones in school, because they will take it away from me.
此句中的dare为行为动词，后面要接带to的不定式，但在口语中，有时to也省略；dare如果作情态动词，则后面一定直接接动词原形，且无人称、数、格的变化。
例如：
He dare not drive the care on expressways, as all the other cars are going so fast. （情态动词，注意其形式）
他不敢在高速公路上开车，因为所有其它的车都跑得那么快。
I didn’t dare (to) do it in class because the teacher might scold me. （及物动词，注意to的问题）
我不敢在课上做这件事，因为老师会训我。
3．Some parents worry that their children will spend too much time and money on phone calls.
此句的worry后面接宾语从句。Worry后面还可以接about 构成词组，表示“对…担心”，强调动作；另外，词组be worried about 也表示“对…担心”，强调状态。
再如：
Where have you been? We’ve been worried about you.
你去哪儿了？我们一直都在为你担心。
Parents always worry about their children.
父母总是为自己的孩子担心。
【考点透视 考例精析】
[考点] 考查谓语动词被动语态的用法。
[考例1] --Have you moved into the new house?
--Not, yet, the rooms _______________.
A．are being painted B．are painting
C．are painted D．are being painting
[解析] A 本句的意思是“因为新房子正在粉刷，所以我还没有搬进去”。用现在进行时的被动语态。
[拓展] 除了现在进行时的被动语态，过去进行时的被动语态也是值得注意的一点。
例如：
The lost children were last seen playing by the side of the river.
最后有人看见那些失踪的孩子在河边玩。
[考点] 介词短语的语义辨析。
[考例2] I don’t think I’ll need any money but I’ll bring some ___________.
A．at last B．in case C．once again D．in time
[解析] B 本句前面的分句已经说明“主语认为自己不需要钱”，所以but后的分句说明“带上点钱以防万一”。
[拓展] in case与in case of的用法要注意。再如：
Take an umbrella with you in case it rains.
随手带把伞以防天下雨。
In case of danger he was always standing in front of me.
在危机时刻他总是站在我前面。
In case of fire, you should always stay calm.
在发生火灾的时候，你应该总是保持镇定。
[考点] 考查turn构成的词组的用法。
[考例3] The children are always _________ practicing playing football when they have PE lessons.
A．taking turns B．by turns C．in turns D．at turns
[解析] A 本句的空白处缺少谓语。因而用take turns doing something结构，意思是“轮流做某事”；by turns和in turn都可以表示“轮流做某事”，但都是介词短语，只能作状语。
[考点] 考察动词的时态。
[考例4] Mr. Smith searched the Internet for nearly two hours before he _________.
A．was decided well B．had made a good decision
C．made a good decision D．has made up his mind
[解析] C 本句的主句用了一般过去时态，因此也决定了从句的时态。排除了B、D项；make up one’s mind意思是“做出决定”，但是时态不对。
【基础演练】
一、根据所给首字母或括号中的汉语意思填写句子空格中所缺的单词。
1．As a great scientist, he is famous t___________ the world.
2． Please r________ me of my interview with Mr. Smith again tomorrow.
3．Those small factories are causing a lot of e_____________ pollution with all their noise and smoke.
4． They've r__________ the prices in the shop, so it's a good time to buy.
5． Jane o_________ the party. She a bought the food and drinks and asked people to come .
6． I made an ___________ (约定) to see the doctor yesterday.
7． She is a very ________________(有吸引力的) girl. Everyone likes her.
8． As a reporter, he is very _____________(成功).
9． They took strong _________（措施）against dangerous drivers.
10． The patient was asked to ring the bell in an ____________(紧急情况).
二、单项填空：
1．The coat ________ you well, but I don’t think the color _________ you.
A．dress, suits B．is fit for, fits on C．fits, suits D．is dressed, fits
2．She’s a bit shy and __________ answer teacher’s questions in class.
A．not dare to B．dare not to C．doesn’t dare D．dares not
3．Imagine that you are one of the volunteers __________ the foreigners, what should you do?
A．to choose serving B．choose to serve
C．choosing serving D．chosen to serve
4．Because of human being’s keeping killing, some kinds of animals are __________.
A．in danger of B．endangered C．dangerous D．in endanger
5．Someone called up in the middle of the night, but they hung up _________ I could answer the phone.
A．as B．since C．until D．before
6．It is generally considered unwise to give a child __________ he or she wants.
A．however B．whatever C．whichever D．whenever
7．The police found that the house _________ and a lot of things _____________.
A．has broken into, has been stolen B．had broken into, had been stolen
C．has been broken into, stolen D．had been broken into, stolen
8．What surprised me was not what he said but ___________ he said it.
A．in the way B．in the way that C．the way D．the way which
9．Our guests were expected at 8 o’clock, but they didn’t ________ till 8:30.
A．turn on B．turn up C．turn over D．turn down
10．Mr. Li made up his mind to devote all he could _______ his oral English.
A．improve B．to improve C．improving D．to improving
【能力拓展】
阅读理解：
When a rather dirty, poorly-dressed person kneels at your feet and puts out his hands to beg for a few coins, do you hurry on, not knowing what to do, or do you feel sad and hurriedly hand over some money? What should our attitude to beggars be? There can’t be no question that the world is full of terrible sad stories. It must be terrible to have no idea where our next meal is going to come from. It seems cruel not to give some money to beggars..
Certainly, most of the world’s great religions order us to be open-hearted and share what we have with those less fortunate than ourselves. But has the world changed? Maybe what was morally(道德方面) right in the old days, when one knew exactly who in the village had suffered misfortune and needed help, is no longer the best idea. Quite a few people will not give to beggars. Let us look at their arguments.
First, some believe that many city beggars dress up on purpose to look pitiable and actually make a good living from begging. Giving to beggars only encourages this sort of evil(恶行). Secondly, there is the opinion that there is no real excuse for begging. One might be poor, but that is no reason for losing one’s sense of pride and self-dependence..
Related to this in the opinion that the problem should be dealt with by the government rather than ordinary people . Some people think beggars should go to the local government department and receive help.
It is hard to come to any final conclusion; there are various cases and we must deal with them differently. A few coins can save a life in some situations, and even if the money is wasted, that does not take away the moral goodness of the giver.
1．What is mainly discussed in the passage?
A．Moral deeds of people. B．Religious activities of the church.
C． Moral goodness of the giver D．Arguments on giving to beggars.
2．What can we infer from the sentence “But has the world changed?” in the second paragraph?
A．People no longer know who was morally right in the past.
B．Some people will not do what was morally right in the past.
C．We don’t meet with those who need help any more.
D．Now it is the government’s duty to help the beggars.
3．Which of the following is NOT mentioned in the passage?
A．Some people dress up to pretend to be beggars.
B．Some beggars want money to help their children go to school.
C．Some beggars use the money to buy drugs.
D．Some beggars have no excuse for begging.
4．In the last paragraph, the writer thinks that it is hard to come to any final conclusion, because ___________.
A. the cases can be so different B. there are so many beggars
C. there is so much money wasted D. there are so many different arguments
参考答案
高一部分
Units 9-10 (B1)
基础演练
一、1．throughout 2．remind 3．environmental 4．reduced 5．organized 6．appointment 7．attractive 8．successful 9．measures 10．emergency
二、1-5 CCDBD 6-10 BDCBD
能力拓展
1-4 DBBA
1. D 这是一个主旨题。本篇文章主要讨论了是否给乞丐钱的观点。
2．B 这是一个细节推断题。根据第二段的句子“Maybe what was mortally(道德方面) right in the old days, when one knew exactly who in the village had suffered misfortune and needed help, is no longer the best idea.”可知答案。
3．B 这是个判断正误题。第三段讲述了“假装扮成乞丐”、“用乞讨来的钱买毒品”、“没有行乞的理由”。只有B项（乞讨来的钱送孩子去上学）没有在文章中提到。
4．A 这是一个细节题。原因在于作者说“there are various cases and we must deal with them differently”。说明作者是想告诉我们情况是各种各样的。
篇12：unit 5 教案(人教版高一英语教案教学设计)
一、教学内容分析
(一)、知识背景及新课程、新教材
本单元围绕the Silver Screen(影视) 这一主题开展听、说、读、写多种教学活动。影视作为人类文明的一大体现，作为当今社会人们主要休闲、娱乐方式之一，是一个非常贴近生活、具有时代性、可挖掘性的教学主题。
本单元所选的语言素材涉及中外名片、著名演员、著名导演， 具有典型的时代气息，有利于学生了解外国文化，增强世界意识。正如新课程标准中的教学建议所提：学习中文影视文化有利于“拓展学生的文化视野，发展他们跨文化交际的意识和能力”；在利用现代教育技术观看影视片断、影视海报的教学过程中，“拓宽了学生学习和运用英语的渠道”；同时本单元的教学对教师本身的中外文化修养、广阔的知识面等方面有非常高的要求。
（二）、教学重点难点
1. 语言知识重点与难点
（1）.关系副词引导的定语从句和介词+关系代词引导的定语从句
（2）与影视相关的词汇
（3）有关发表个人观点的句型、结构
2. 综合知识重点与难点
（1）.对国外著名影星、导演及他们作品的了解。如教材中涉及的Meryl Streep，Keanu Reeves，Steve Spielberg等，以扩大学生知识面、文化视野。如何填补学生这方面知识缺乏的信息沟。
（2）.对国内著名影视导演及他们代表作品的了解。如何设计任务让学生从课内知识到课外知识的链接。
（3）.对影视界名人及电影的评价（comments）如何写影评（review）。
二、教学目标
（一）.知识技能
1. 学习、掌握关系副词when，where.，why 引导的定语从句及介词+关系代词引导的定语从句。
2. 学习掌握一些有关影视的词汇：
如： career, director, script, play a role in ,Oscar, award, studio, scene, follow-ups等。
掌握其他一些课文中涉及的词汇：
如：graduate, attack, creature, owe…to…, take off等。
3. 学习掌握一些用于讨论、评价电影的结构句式：
如：What’s the film about?
What do you think about the story of the film?
How do you feel about the film?
I like / don’t like the film because…
The film is about… I think the ending of the film is …
4. 提高学生语言听、说、读、写的能力及扮演角色、编写剧本、撰写影评等的综合语言运用能力?
（二）. 情感态度
1. 学习几位著名影星、导演执著于艺术、献身于艺术的敬业精神和对人类艺术的巨大贡献。
2. 从Keanu Reeves 艰辛的成功途中（In the begin did many small jobs, then played in many cheap films.）我们可以学习到：要成就事业需付出辛勤劳动，要有持之以恒、坚持不懈的恒心与毅力。
3. 通过学习国外著名影视界人物，培养学生了解、尊重异国文化，体现国际合作精神。
4. 通过开展小组活动，指导学生积极与人合作，相互学习，相互帮助，培养其团队精神。
（三）.学习策略
1. 认知策略
能总结定语从句的结构规律，并加以应用；在学习中借助电影海报图画、图表等非语言信息进行理解或表达。
2. 调控策略
利用影视资源，主动拓宽英语学习渠道，创造和把握学习英语的机会；积极参与采访、表演、调查等英语学习活动。
3. 交际策略
充分利用采访、表演等真实交际活动提高用英语交际的能力，在其过程中能借助手势、表情等非语言手段提高交际效果，能克服语言障碍，维持交际。
4. 资源策略
通过了解影视知识，获得更广泛的英语信息，拓展所学知识。
（四）.文化意识
1. 了解英语国家影视界艺术家的成长经历、成就和贡献。
2. 通过学习，了解世界著名影视文化，培养世界意识。
3. 通过中外影视文化对比，加深对中国影视文化的理解。
三、教学步骤
(一) Warming up
这部分的重点是引出本单元的话题---电影，了解学生对电影的熟悉程度并充分发挥学生的想象力。同时训练学生说的能力。
活动步骤：
1．师生互动：教师提一些问题如Do you like seeing films? How often? Favorite actor? Actress? Film? 在此过程中教师可展示一些学生熟悉并喜欢的名演员、名片的海报，从视觉上激发学生对本话题的兴趣。
2．小组活动：教师选取几副不同题材的电影画面（可选取教材外的其它画面），要求学生进行小组合作，每小组选一幅画面进行讨论What is happening in this scene? What happens before/after the scene? 要求学生不拘泥于已知的电影内容，发挥自己的想象力，给出各种不同的观点。
3．班级活动：向班级其它同学描述本小组所选图片，其他同学可给出不同意见。
（二）listening
本单元的听力是培养学生捕捉特定信息的能力，并让学生熟悉interview这种形式。Task: To discuss what questions the reporters will ask when interviewing famous directors.
活动形式：
1． 师生互动：教师设置开放性的问题，进一步启发学生思考，并为过渡到听力部分做准备。问题可设置为：Of course these films now are very popular and successful, and what does the success of the films bring to the actors? 学生各抒己见，金钱、荣誉、名气，成为公众人物后带来一个问题They received a lot of interviews。
2． 小组活动：教师引出问题What questions will you ask when interviewing an actor?通过小组讨论，收集尽可能多的问题，一方面让学生预测听力中可能会出现的问题，同时也对interview这种形式有所了解。
3． 班级活动：完成听力练习
（三）Speaking
本单元说的任务是利用阅读所得信息开展对名演员的interview,从而提
高学生在真实语境中的交际能力。教师还可让学生尝试当演员，从而对
演员的职业有所了解并增加学习趣味。
Task: To interview famous actors and directors in different ways.
活动形式：
1、师生互动：教师可设置问题了解学生对电影大奖及获奖演员的了解程度，为接下来的两位演员的介绍作好铺垫。问题可为Can you tell me some famous awards to the films in the world? Try to tell the famous actors, actresses and the films you know that have won the Oscar.
1． 班级活动：教师可为学生播放分别由Meryl streep和Keanu Reeves主演的电影Out of Africa《走出非洲》和 speed《生死时速》片段，并可展现他们主演的其它电影的海报，让学生在视觉上对这两位演员及他们的表演有所了解。
2． 个人活动，但先把学生分成两组，分组阅读，然后完成下面表格中的信息。
Birth (time/place)
schooling
Beginning of the acting career
films
family
3． 小组活动：选两位学生，一位当主持人，一位当Meryl streep/Keanu Reeves，其他同学充当观众，模仿央视“艺术人生”的形式作一访谈，要求主持人留一些时间给观众提问。
4． 师生互动：教师可引导学生讨论下列问题：
1） Why are they so popular and successful?
2） What is needed to be an actor/actress?
3） Would you like to be an actor/actress one day? Why(not)?
6. 小组活动：教师播放电影“home alone”《小鬼当家》片段，将原声消去，让学生分组给出对白及表演，最后可让学生互评哪一组做得最好。
(四) Word Study(提前)：
本单元词汇学习的目的主要是让学生掌握一些与电影有关的词语如studio、follow-ups、award、script等，对学生而言，有些生疏，因此教师可给出一些视觉上的帮助。
教学形式：
师生互动
在教学过程中，先利用图片，实物等教具对学生进行直观的教学，使之有更清晰的认识后，再辅之以语境，利用语境来推测词义，达到猜词的效果。如给出The Matrix和The Matrix Reloaded的电影海报，学生很容易得出：The Matrix Reloaded is the follow-up of The Matrix。通过这样的铺垫，学生在做第七小题时，只要利用好文中的线索Speed II, Jurassic Park III就可以轻而易举的得出follow-ups。
（五）Pre-reading
此部分的关键在于让学生了解如何制作电影，尤其是通过了解电影的制
作而突出导演的重要作用。Task: To experience being a director (write one scene of the film and act it out).
活动形式
1．师生互动：教师提问If you want to make a film, who do you
need to invite?通过此问题引出电影制作过程中所需的各种角色，如photographer, actor/actress, editor, director等等
2．小组活动：
1）教师可设置这样的讨论题：What part would you like to play in making a film?根据选择分组，让他们讨论选择各角色的理由。同时讨论各角色在电影制作中所做的不同工作。通过讨论，学生不难发现，在电影的制作过程中，导演起了非常关键的作用。
2）根据所选的各种角色交叉分组，发挥各自的作用。
Think of one scene you are quite familiar with and act it out.
a. What would the scene be like and what happens in it?
b. Who are the main actors in that scene and what do they do?
c. Write a short dialogue and act it out
（六）reading
本篇阅读材料是人物传记，介绍了著名导演Steven Spielberg 的成长经历以及他的主要成就和作品。通过文章的学习，旨在了解西方的电影文化背景以及学习名导Steven Spielberg的那种对自己的事业坚持不懈、孜孜以求的精神。
活动形式：
1．小组活动
分别给出阅读材料中提到的五幅电影（Jaws, E.T., Jurassic Park, Schindler’s List, Saving Private Ryan）的图片，把学生分成不同的小组，对图片进行预测，各个小组根据不同的图片猜想影片的大概内容及主题。
2．个人活动
快速阅读课文的Para3-5 , 查找出有关这5部电影内容和主题的信
息，并核对与自己猜想是否相符。
3．个人活动
阅读并查找有关Spielberg的信息：
1） When and where was he born?
2） When did he start making films?
3） What did he use to make films at first? and later?
4） What was his dream?
5） What did he study?
6） When and with what did his career take off?
7） What does Spielberg owe his success to?
（七） Post-reading
该部分可分成两块，其中第二块内容可以提前到阅读中去完成，也可在读后总结，当学生读完影片内容时，可以根据自己的理解写出五部影片的内容是什么（写尝试应用定语从句，体验定语从句的结构）。第一块（Questions）中第1，3，5三个问题比较难，从文中直接找不到答案，也是学生理解上需要升华的部分。可以通过分组，让学生讨论来理解这几个问题。让学生领会以下几点：1）、英语作为工具的重要性 2）、不懈努力、持之以恒 3）、成功需要家人的支持，合作、互助精神。
（八）Language study
这部分的重点是学习掌握关系副词when，where，why 引导的定语从句及介词+关系代词引导的定语从句。Task: To talk about some famous directors in China and some of their most famous and popular films, using attributive clause.
活动步骤：
1． 师生互动：教师提一些问题如What Chinese directors do you know?
What are their well-known films? 在此过程中教师可展示一些学生熟悉的国内知名导演的海报，从视觉上激发学生的兴趣。然后谈论某个导演及他的代表作品，引出定语从句。
如Zhang Yimou is the famous director who successfully directed the film Hero.
2．小组活动：教师选取几副大家熟悉的国产大片的电影画面，要求学生进行小组讨论，分别来自什么电影，他们的男、女主角（main actor/actress）分别是谁。然后用定语从句知识来谈论。如：Shaolin Soccer is a funny film in which Zhou Xingchi plays the main role.
3．班级活动：给出几副图片及几个关键词（key words），用所学定语从句来描述图片。如：
北京申奥成功图 Beijing the city Beijing is the city where/in which the 2008 Olympic Games will be held.
4．大组活动：全班以座位为单位分4大组，开展竞赛。1）小组讨论，两人一组，一学生创设一个情景并给出2-3个关键词，另一名同学用定语从句进行描述。2）班级活动；结果汇报，教师记录，看哪个大组能正确描述的情景最多。教师给出评价。
（九）Integrating Skills
该部分主要阅读张艺谋的影片Not One Less并学习如何评价电影及写影评。Task: Make comments on films and write reviews about them.
1. 师生互动：教师可设置问题了解学生对张艺谋及其主要作品的熟悉情况，为接下来阅读Not One Less 作铺垫。问题可为 What does he do? What is famous for? What films has he directed? What is his recent film? What else do you know about him? 同时呈现张的有关信息表格，为后面的Survey 作铺垫。通过提问谈论《一个也不能少》有关情节，为阅读作铺垫。
2． 个人活动：阅读Not One Less ；回答问题，填写信息表。
3． 班级活动：学习写review 的有关建议。并以Not One Less 作为例子写影评一篇。
4．个人活动：Survey--Your favorite director and his film in china
5．小组活动：讨论关于Your favorite film What’s it about? What kind of story do you think it is? How do you think of the actors/ actresses?...
6．个人活动：模仿前面所学，写一篇影评 My Favorite Film
7．两人活动：交换作文，从影评内容、时态、单词拼写、所用词汇等方面相互交流、修改。
8．班级活动：推荐一名学生在班上交流所写影评。
篇13：高二 Revision (Units 6-10)(人教版高一英语教案教学设计)
(Revision)
Step 1: Go over the words and expressions once again by a dictation or sentences making:
Forecast, major, trend, contemporary, indicate, urban, energy, ensure, system, consumer, reform, customer, goods, purchase, tiny, cash, remain, importance, regularly, physician, cure, biochemistry, educator, hopeful, reality
In general, keep in touch with, pay attention to, in store,
Virus, via, mosquito, prevention, persuade, defenseless, illness, treatment, liquid, unprotected, sex, lack, proper, discourage, cheer, network, specialist, meaningful, boyfriend, identify, billionaire, stranger, weep, cell, chemical, radiation, fighter, contrary.
Cheer….up, a great many, on the contrary
Drown, bleed, choke, prevent, electric, electrical, wire, container, scream, witness, calm, panic, ambulance, tip, slightly, chest, circulate, pulse, wound, blanket, manage, pale, motorcycle, sudden, worn-out, eventually, bite, tap, loose, bandage, explanation, first aid, keep in mind, roll over, manage to do sth, , in honor of
Coal, attend, issue, environmentalist, summarize, content, introduction, representative, killer, access, violence, premier, stress, equality, fairness, responsibility, willingness, harmony, suffering, unfair, wipe, worldwide, alternative, defend, incorrect, affect, advise, take notes, the United Nations, take action, air conditioner, in harmony with,, put an end to, wipe out , advise sb. Not to do sth,
Frightening, hurricane, astronomy, uneasy, unpleasant, upset, terrify, erupt, ash, mud, spot, flee, urge, meanwhile, sheet, protect, severely, heart-breaking, giant, steady, steam, full-powered, steamship. Unbelievable, stillness, whisper, appropriate, at hand, knock about, all of a sudden, as though
Step 2: Come to the following topic and ask the Ss to say something about each topic:
life in the future; deadly diseases and attitude towards AIDS, cancer, etc.; first aid and medicine; nature ecology and the environment; natural disasters
Step 3: Review the new Grammar Items:
Noun Clauses:(2); Subjunctive Mood (虚拟语气); Inversion; Ellipsis
Noun Clauses:(2)
What life will be like in the future is difficult to predict.
They are careful about what they wear.
If we learn to accept change and appreciate what is new and different….
Subjunctive Mood (虚拟语气)
If everyone in the country knew first aid, many lives might be saved.
I wish that she were here with me and that we weren’t sick.
I wish I could remember more about my mum.
We wish we could have arrived there two hours earlier.
If I had not been tired, I would have helped her.
If he had known the news, he might have told you.
If it were to rain, I would stay at home.
Inversion
Not until we know more will we be able to improve the situation.
Only by changing how we live can we save the earth.
Had I known that air conditioners cause so much pollution, I would never have bought one.
There exist serious problems and there is still time to take actions.
Ellipsis
A word about your composition.
Though tired, he was not disheartened.
You would do the same.
Sit down , please.
We’ll do the best we can.
Everybody gone?
That letter was the last.
Step 4: Some exercises on the Grammar.
Step 5: Review Functional Items in the Units6-10
Making prediction/ Supporting an opinion/ Express dos and don’ts/ Express feelings
A. Making prediction:
What will life be like in the future?
How will people….
Where will people work….
It would be wonderful if …..
It would be bad for …. If…….
It’s possible/ impossible to …..
No one can predict what /when…...
B. Supporting an opinion:
I think that …. Because ….
First,….
One reason is that…..
For example, …..
If we/they were to …. We/ they could …..
Challenging an opinion
Perhaps, but what if/ about….
Have you thought about….
What makes you think that ….?
Could you please explain ….?
If I were you, I would …..
C. Express dos and don’ts:
You should always….
You ought to /should….
You must/ have to….
You should not …..
You should never….
You must never…
D. Express feelings
How terrible!
It makes me feel uneasy when…
I think it’s very unpleasant……
It makes me feel very worried….
I get very upset….
It’s a frightening thing….
I dare not….
I’m really scary….
It takes my hair stand on end.
Step 6: Some additional exercises.
篇14：高一Units 19-20(人教版高考复习英语教案教学设计)
[教学目的]强化所学知识，温故知新，掌握一定的解题方法。
[教学重点]掌握重点词汇和短语。
[教学难点]同义词辨析
[重点词汇]：promise, pretend, offer, refuse, come out, include(contain), develop, describe, remove, support, cross, character, press, print, tie,
[重点词组]：pick up, agree to sth., lie to sb., throw away, call at, at the same time
enjoy doing, look down upon, to everyone’s surprise, find out, come out, cut…into, find out, the rest of., by doing sth., be+ adj.+ to do.
[重点句型和交际用语]：1. It seems that…. 6. I’m not sure.
2. I don’t think so. 7. Do you call that…?
3. That’s not fair. 8. How did… come out?
4. I believe…. 9. What’s the problem with…?
5. I guess…. 10. too+adj.+for sb./sth…(to do)
课时安排：第一课时：知识梳理
第二课时：词语归纳、拓展
第三课时：创新跨越训练
第四、五课时：《导学教程》练习
[重点语言点详解]
1. 1)agree with “同意,赞成” ，后接人或表示“意见；观点；看法”的词。
1>You’d better agree with your boss/her. 你最好还是同意老板/她的意见。
2>I completely agree with your views on this point. 在这一点上，我完全同意你的看法。
3>They don’t quite agree with my-methods(opinions,idea). 他们不太赞成我的办法。
>>agree with还可表示“与 一致”（气候，食物等）适合。
1>The verb must agree with the subject in person and number.动词在人称和数上必须与主语一致。
2>The climate here doesn’t agree with me. 这儿的气候我不适应。
2)agree to意为“同意 赞成”，后接表“提议；安排；计划”等的词。
1>Both of them agreed to my plan(proposal/suggestion) about the travel.
他们两个都同意我提出的关于旅行的计划（提议/建议）。
3)agree on“对 取得一致意见；在 方面同意或意见一致”，后常跟表具体的协议的文件、计划、行动等的名词。
1>Both parties agreed on the terms of the contract.双方就合同中的条款达成了一致意见。
4)agree to do sth.“同意做某事”
1>We agree to go there.
2>He agree not to attend the meeting.
5)agree + that表示“一致认为，同意”
1>We all agree that his idea is a fine one.我们一致认为他的主意不错。
2. cross
1)adj. 脾气不好的，易怒的
1>He has never heard cross words from his wife.他从妻子那里从没听见过气话。
2) vt. 跨过，穿过
1>If you cross the street alone, please be careful.你自己过马路，一定要当心。
3) n. 十字，十字架
1>The question is marked with a cross.那个问题被标了个十字。
3. pretend vt. + to do/that-clause（不定式和从句作宾语）
1>He lay down on the ground and pretended to be dead when the bear came near.
当熊走进时，他躺在地上装死。
2>She pretended not to have seen me when I saw her.
当我看到她时，她假装没看到我。
3>They pretended to be working hard when the old man entered the room.
当老人走进房间时，他们假装在努力工作。
4>I pretended not to know the secret.
我装着不知道这个秘密。
5>Before the enemy, he pretended that he didn’t know me.
在敌人面前，他假装不认识我。
6>Please don’t pretend that you know everything.
请你不要装着你什么都懂。
3．refuse vt. + n./pron./to do
1>She was sorry to refuse his invitation to the party.
她不好意思地拒绝了他发出的参加晚会的邀请。
2>He refused my help, and tried his best to do it himself.
他拒绝了我的帮助， 尽力自己干了起来。
3>they refuses to tell us their address and telephone number.
他们拒绝告诉我们他们的地址和电话号码。
4>I received an invitation yesterday but I refused to accept it.
昨天我收到了一份请贴， 但我拒不接受。
refuse+间接宾语+直接宾语
1>He refused me money.他不肯给我钱。
4．guess
1)动词guess 可直接带宾语，也可接at 介词短语，可接复合宾语或that从句。
1>Can you guess (at) the price?
2>Can you guess (at) his age?
3>I guess her to be over thirty.=I guess that she is over thirty.
注：习惯上在名词answer 或it前不用at。如：He guessed the right answer.（他猜出了正确答案。）You guess it.（你猜猜看。）
注：give a guess或 make a guess均表示“作一猜测”的意思。
2)guess 可用来表示“觉得”，“认为”，=think
1>I guess men’s hands and fingers are too big!
2>I guess it’s going to rain soon.
注：believe, suppose, guess, find, feel许多时候可接 that从句,在意思上相当于think。
5. character
1) a Chinese character意为“一个汉字”。
1>In the beginning (=At first) they used to carve Chinese characters on stones to record important dates in history.
起初他们常常把汉字刻在石头上以记载历史上的重要日子。
2) character表示小说、戏剧、电影等中的“人物，角色”。
1>I find all the characters in his new play amusing and interesting.
我觉得他着部新剧中的所有任务既逗人发笑又很有趣。
2>Jack was a remarkable character.杰克是个不寻常的人物。
3) character表示“特征”，“特性”。
1>What is the character of the chemical?这一化学物质有什么特性？
2>The two problems are quite different in character.
这两个问题在性质上是完全不同的。
4)character表示人的“性格”，“品质”。
1>He is a man of strong character.他是个性格刚强的人。
6. past
1) n.过去
1>He would like people to forget his past.
2)adj.过去的
1>The past week has been very interesting.
3)adv.（从旁）过去
1>They went past without noticing the board.
4)prep.过去，超过
1>It was five past eleven.
2>She is already past eighteen.
7. tie
1)tie to“捆，绑，拴”，也可引申为“约束，束缚”。
1>he tied the horse to the tree.
2>He is tied to his work all day.他整天都被工作缠着。
2)tie up“捆紧”；“绑起来”
1>Please tie up all these boxes.
2>The thief was tied up.
3) tie n.“领带，绳子”，也可引申为使人结合起来的某种“关系”。
1>He was wearing a red tie.
2>Please find me a tie to tie up all these books.
3)We are united by some invisible tie.我们被某种无形的纽带连结在一起。
8.invent
1)invent=create or design something not existing before，“发明”、“创造”
1>What happened before printing was invented? 在印刷术发明以前情况怎么样？
2>Edison invented the electric light. 爱迪生发明了电灯。
[注意]Invent指创造发明以前不存在的东西或方法，指发现不为人们所知但大自然实际存在的事物。
2)invent还可用来表示“虚构”或“捏造”一个情况，=make up or think of。
1>He invented an excuse for being late.他编造了一个迟到的借口。
2>The whole story was invented.整个故事都是虚构的。
9.press vt.& vi.按；挤；压
1>The shoe is pressing my toe.这只鞋挤我的脚趾。
2>If you want to start the computer, press this button.如果你想开电脑，请按此按钮。
3>The little boy pressed his nose against the shop window.
小男孩把鼻子紧贴在橱窗上。
4>He pressed my hand warmly when we met.我们见面时他热情地紧握我的手。
5>I don’t like shoes that press.我不太喜欢太紧的鞋子。
10.print vt. & vi.印，打上印记；印刷，付印，发表
1>The mark of the boy’s shoes is printed clearly in the mud.
哪个男孩的鞋印清楚地印在泥上。
2>That terrible accident was printed on my memory.那次可怕的事故牢记在我的心中
3>The top line of this page hasn’t been properly printed.这页上端一行印刷得不好。
4>This machine prints 2,000 pages in an hour.这部机器每小时印2,000张。
5>The new press prints rapidly.这台新的印刷机印得很快。
11.form
1)form v.“形成”、“建立”、“养成”的意思。
1>These pieces of bamboo or wood were tied together to form a book.
把这些竹片或木片系在一起就成了一本书。
2>A sentence is formed by putting words together in a proper order.
将单词以正确的顺序排列在一起就形成了一个句子。
3>Steam forms (is formed)when water boils.水一沸腾，蒸汽就形成了。
4>They formed(=set up) a trade union to organize all the workers.
为了把所有工人组织起来，他们建立了工会。
5>We have formed (=set up) a class for beginners in French.
我们成立了一个法语初级班。
6>His character was formed in his childhood.他的性格是从小养成的。
7>A good idea formed (was formed) in his mind.他脑子里有了一个好主意。
[注]form the habit of …=fall/get into the habit of…,在意思上接近。get used to…,表示“养成了习惯”。
He has formed the habit of taking notes in class.他已养成了上课记笔记的习惯。
2) n.“形状，形态”；“形式，方式”；“表格”。
1>Ice, snow and steam are different forms of water.冰、雪和蒸汽是水的不同形态。
2>This verb has two past forms.这个动词有两种过去时形式。
3>Please fill in the form in ink.请用钢笔填写这张表格。
搭配：take the form of…采取…的形式 in any shape or form无论什么形式
12.include
1)include vt. “包括”、“包含”
1>This plan includes most of your suggestions.这项计划里包括了你们的大部分建议
2>The group included two engineers and twenty workers.
这个队共有两名工程师和二十个工人。
[注] include +doing
My job doesn’t include making coffee for the boss.我的工作并不包括为老板煮咖啡。
2)including 作介词，后接名词、代词或名词性从句作宾语。 Included用作形容词，有被动含义，应放在名词/代词之后。试比较：
1>A lot people attended yesterday’s meeting, including 10 foreigners.
2>At least 20 persons got hurt, including 3 policemen.
3>All of us, Gary included, will make a trip to London next week.
13.by+doing “用……方式”、“凭靠……手段”
1>I make a living by teaching English at school.我以在学校教英语为生。
2>The boss has made a lot of money by selling building materials.
老板（通过）卖建筑材料赚了很多钱。
3>We can learn spoken English well by pactising speaking English a great deal both in and out of class. 通过课堂内外大量的讲英语训练，我们可以学好英语口语。
14.promise
1)vt. “答应”、“许诺”。
(1)promise+n./pron. promise sth., promise sb. sth.
1>He that promises too much means nothing.许愿太多的人是不打算兑现的。
2>I’m afraid I can’t promise you anything.恐怕我们什么也不能许诺给你。
(2)promise to do sth./promise sb. to do sth.
1>I never promised to obey her orders.我从未答应过要服从她的命令。
2>Promise me never to trouble me again.答应我决不再麻烦我。
(3)promise+that-clause,有时可带间接宾语。
1>He promised he would never do it again. 他答应以后再不这样干了。 2>He promised that he would pay back the money within two weeks. 他答应两周内还钱。
2)vi.
I’ll try to help him out, but I can’t promise.我将尽力帮助他，但我不能许诺。
3)link-verb, “预示着”、“有可能”
The clear sky promises fine weather tomorrow.请晴朗的天空预示着明天是个好天气
4.n. “诺言”，常作可数名词。
1>It’s easy to make a promise.许愿是容易的。
2>I’m sorry for having broken my promise.对不起，我食言了。
3>Give me your promise that you will never do it again.答应我以后再不那样干了。
[注]make a promise许诺, keep a promise遵守诺言, break a promise.违背诺言
15.too…for… 太过于
1>The dress is too small for me.
2>The question is too difficult for me.
3>The work was too much for him.
16.back to front穿反了
back to front是合成词，由“名词+介词+名词”构成，在句中作状语，如果词与词之间有连字符连接，相当于形容词。
The old man has on his sweater back to front.
联想：face to face 面对面的back to back背靠背的
side by side肩并肩的 hand in hand手拉手的
shoulder to shoulder肩并肩的 neck to neck齐头并进的，并驾齐驱的
相似词语辨析：
1. in surprise, to one’s surprise
1)in surprise意为“惊奇地”常位于动词之后作状语，表示方式。
1>John turned around and looked at me in surprise.约翰转过身来，惊奇地望着我。
2>“A farmer?” said the Frenchman in surprise.“农夫？”那个法国人惊奇地说到。
2)to one’s surprise /to the surprise of sb.意为“使人吃惊的是”、“出乎意料地”，常位于句首，作状语，表示行为的结果。类似的结构有：
to one’s joy/delight/pleasure使人高兴的是
to one’s sorrow使人悲伤的是
to one’s satisfaction使人满意的是
有时为了强调产生某种情感的程度，可在to 后面的名词前加great, deep 等形容词或在to前加副词much。
1>To the surprise of the young couple, they found the necklace missing.
使这对年轻夫妇惊奇的是， 他们发现项链不见了。
2>To their great joy, the sailors saw land at last. 水手们终于见到陆地了， 他们兴奋不已。
3>Much to my surprise, she failed in the examination.
使我非常奇怪的是，她考试没及格。
2. job, work, works,labour
1)job 常指具体一件工作，是可数名词。work泛指所有长期的或短期的需要体力或脑力的工作，是不可数名词，通常与job替换使用。如：
1>He did a lot of useful jobs/work.
2>I can not find work in this town.
3>Thousands of workers lost their jobs when the factory closed.
2)好的工作或特别困难的工作，习惯上用job,另外，quite a job也是表示特别困难的工作。如：
1>He has a good job in a bank.
2>It was quite a job (a difficult job) finding his lost child.
注：make a good/fine job of sth.做得好。
句型：look for a job寻找工作find a job找到一份工作ask for the job想要这份工作take the job接受这份工作
习惯用语：out of a job失业on the job工作着，忙碌着倒霉a bad(good)（幸运）事 do a job on sb./do sb’s job毁了某人
3)works 著作；作品 the works of Karl Marx卡尔*马克思的著作
The Complete Works of Lu Hsun 《鲁迅全集》works of literature and art文艺作品
>>works （建筑等）工程；[军]工事；[用作单或复数]工厂 e.g. public works公共建筑工程，市政工程the Ministry of Works 建筑工程部 defensive work(s) 防御工事 a cement works水泥厂
>>works活动的机件 e.g. clean the works of a clock擦洗钟的机件
>>works （神学用语）善行，德行
4)labour多指艰苦的、紧张的、劳累的体力劳动，也指脑力劳动。一般不用来指具体概念。如：
1>Labour creates the world. 劳动创造了世界。
2>He was well paid for his labour. 他干的活得到很好的报酬。
3. method, way, means
1>二者都可以表示“方法”。way是普通用语，指做事的方法，也可指思想方法，生活方式等。如：
<1>There’s only one way of doing this properly.
<2>The way she spoke hurt me.
<3>What is best way to make tea?
<4>That’s English way of living.
2) method 指系统的、具有一定理论性的方法，强调条理性和高效率。如：
>>method 后面可接to do sth./of doing sth.
<1>We must improve the method of teaching English.
<2>You should use different methods to solve different problems.
>>如果表达用什么方法，常用介词with或by搭配。
If you do it with this method, you’ll succeed.如果你用这种方法做，你会成功的。
>>way表示用什么方法时，常与介词in搭配而means则常与by搭配，也就是说in this way, by this means, with/by this method.
3. everyday, every day
1)everyday adj.常用作定语，意为“每日的；日常的”，如： everyday life（日常生活）,everyday English（日常英语）等。 2)every day是名词词组，常用作状语，意为“每天地；天天地”。
1>He can speak everyday English very well.
2>Teaching the students English is my everyday job.
3>I teach the students English every day.
4>The film is about American everyday life.
5>They go to school every day except Sunday.
[典型例题分析]
例1 I would love____ to the party last night but I had to work extra hours to finish a report.
A. to go B. to have gone C. going D. having gone
分析 此题中would love/like后须跟不定式，不接动名词作宾语，由此可排除C 、D。又 would love to do sth.表示现在或将来的愿望，显然与本题语境不符，因而排除A 。正确答案为B 。大意为：昨天晚上我本想参加那个晚会，但我不得不加班了几个小时来完成一份报告。would love to have done表示希望做但未能做成。
如：I’d like to have come over to see you last night, but someone called and I couldn’t get away.昨晚本想来看你，但有人找我，脱不开身。
例2 The house ____ doors and windows are all closed is for sale.
A. of which B. whose C. its D. that
分析 答案为B. 此题中的关系代词whose 指物，可与of which 替换，指人时可与of whom替换。如：
The new machine whose parts (=the parts of which) are too small to be seen is made in Shanghai.零件小得看不见的那部新机器是上海制造的。
>>如果用of which 代替题干中的whose,应写成：
The house the doors and windows of which are all closed is for sale.
门窗紧闭的那栋房子是出售的。
[高考真题选讲]
题1.She pretended _____ me when I passed by. (NMET89)
A. not to see B. no seeing C. to not see D. having not seen
分析 pretend后要跟不定式作宾语，不定式的否定形式是在 to 前加not。因此答案为 A 。
题 2 ---Do you think it’s going to rain over the weekend?
---_______.
A. I don’t believe B. I don’t believe it C. I believe not so D. I believe not
分析 本题答案为D。注意I believe not是省略形式，其完整的含义是I believe that it isn’t going to rain over the weekend.
题 3 ---_____ the sports meeting might be put off. (NMET95)
---Yes, it all depends on the weather.
A. I’ve been told B. I’ve told C. I’m told D. I told
分析 该题的考试目标是动词的时态和语态。从it all depends on the weather一句的时态和所告知的内容可以断定，应该用现在完成时的被动语态。答案为A。
题 4 _____ is a fact that English is being accepted as an international language.
A. There B. This C. That D. It (NMET95)
分析 在英语中为了保持句子平衡，常将较长的主语放在句尾（常由不定式短语或连接词引导的从句构成）。而将先行词it置于句首充当逻辑主语（或形式主语）。本题中真正的主语是that English is being accepted as an international language. 答案为D。
改错题： (carelessness)
1>He didn’t pass the driving test because of careless. After all, he is still a boy.
2>---How much does the book worth? ---$ 10. (is / worth-cost)
3>Do you still remember that afternoon when we spent together? (when)/-which/that
4>This is the girl his parents are both engineers. (whose)
5>He is ill in bed. Let’s go to call ^ him. (on)
6>To our surprises, he has got a good job in the company. (surprise)
7>At last the agreed with our suggestion about the work. (to)
8>He did do the work very well. That’s because he was praised. (why)
9>It’s very difficult of us to get there in time. (for)
10>The boy wanted to smoke, but his mother told him not ^. (to)
11>He gave me some informations on the computer. (information)
12>She is famous for her works and ^ a writer. (as)
13>Words written on animal bones are difficult to be read. ( be)
14>I’d like to be taking to the cinema to see the film. (taken)
15>---How long have you studied English? ---From 1990. (Since)
16>Now wood is used to making paper. (make)
对比填空：
1. job/work/works
1>In our factory he has a ____ as a cook. (job)
2>I have much ____ to do this evening. (work)
3>Teaching English at school is my _____. (job/work)
4>He’s been out of ____ for nearly two years. ( work )
5>The iron and steel ____ was closed for Christmas. (works )
6>The carved figure is an unusual ____ of art. (work)
2. included/including
1>A lot of students were praised at the meeting, Tom ___. ( included )
2>A lot of students were praised at the meeting, ___ Tom. ( including )
3>All kinds of food are ___ in the shopping list. ( included )
4>The rent is 70 dollars a month ___ water and electricity. ( including )
5>The price ____ postage then. ( included )
3. move/remove
1>He was ___ from his position as chairman. ( removed )
2>After entering the room, he ___ his hat and gloves. ( removed )
3>She ____the sofa to the corner. ( moved )
4>Don’t ___ about while I’m taking your phone. ( move )
5>What do you advise for ____ ink from my clothes. ( removing )
6>The audience were deeply ___ by the story. ( moved )
4. problem/question
1>The ____ is too difficult for him to answer. ( question )
2>The ____ is too difficult for him to work out. ( problem )
3>She couldn’t get the job, the ___ is that she’s a woman. ( problem )
4>---Can you make it that we must get there before 6 p.m.?
---No ______. ( problem )
5>There are many social ____ in America now. ( problems )
6>Last period our teacher ____ us on verbs. ( questioned )
单词拼写：
1. It’s impossible to stop the d_______ of society. (development)
2. He told all his friends about it, i_______ Jack. (including)
3. The wood f_______ tens of years ago. (formed)
4. I have never seen him and his name is also u_______ to me. (unknown)
5. The pot is made of m_______. (metal)
6. The farmers p_______ the oil from these beans. (pressed)
7. Wait a moment. The papers are being p_____ at present. (printed)
8. The teacher asked us to take out a s___ of paper and write words on it.(sheet)
9. The paper is made from fishing n________. (nets)
10. Is the ________ (发动机) made in China or in Japan? (engine)
篇15：revision teaching plan for unit1 (人教版高一英语教案教学设计)
Teaching Aims and Demands
Words and Phrases:
honest brave wise smart argue found hunt share lie feeling pronounce broad repeat native equal situation international trade communicate exchange service expression publish compare replace consider means experience vacation nature basic equipment simple normal excitement separate unforgettable disaster finally rescue advance seize swallow drag struggle fight flow fright shake strike destroy national fear opportunity touch note career role award prize choice degree speed creature adult industry owe happiness accept primary leader determine live action
fond of hunt for in order to care about such as drop sb a line make oneself at home in total except for stay up come about end up with bring in a great many at the same time get away from watch out protect sb/sth from see sb off on the other hand as well as
Spoken English: Revise the spoken English in the units 1-6.
Grammar: Direct and Indirect Speech, The Attribute Clause.
Teaching aids: Computer
Way of Teaching: dictation and exercises
Lesson 1
Step 1 Dictation
Dictate the key words and phrases in the six units.
argue share native equal situation international communicate compare experience vacation equipment excitement separate unforgettable rescue advance swallow struggle strike destroy opportunity career award degree creature owe primary determine
fond of hunt for in order to care about such as drop sb a line make oneself at home in total except for stay up come about end up with bring in a great many at the same time get away from watch out protect sb/sth from see sb off on the other hand as well as
Step 2 Sentences
1. Chuck survives the crash and lands on a deserted island where there are no people.
2. On the island, Chuck has to learn to survive all alone.
3. Chuck learns that we need friends to share happiness and sorrow.
4. You must be very tired.
5. People also travel to meet new friends, to try new kinds of food, to experience life in other parts of the world, or simply to get away from cold weather.
6.Wear a lot to protect yourself from yourself from the sun.
7. As with hiking, you should always think about your safety and wear good clothes.
8. Looking up at the large head and down at the large feet makes you feel small.
9.After that it still took seven years before they finally got married.
10. When drinking to someone’s health, you raise your glass, but the glasses should not touch.
Check the dictation with the students and explain the use of the underlined words or parts.
Lesson 2
Grammar
1. The Direct and Indirect Speech
A. Change the dialogue below into Indirect Speech.
The following dialogue is an excerpt from Mark Twain’s The million-Pound Bank Note.
Henry found there was a million-pound note in the envelope. HE thought the two brothers had made a mistake. HE hurried to their house and rang the bell. The servant appeared, Henry asked for the brothers.
Servant: They are gone.
Henry: Where?
Servant: To the Continent.
Henry: The continent?
Servant: I can’t say, sir.
Henry: When will they be back?
Servant: I can’t say, sir.
Henry: When will they be back?
Servant: In a month, they said.
Henry: A month! Tell me how to get word to them. It’s of great importance.
Servant: I can’t , indeed. I’ve no idea where they’ve gone.
Henry: Then I must see some member of the family. Servant: Family is away, too --- in Egypt and India, I think.
Henry: There’s been an immense mistake make. They’ll be back before night. Tell them I’ve been here, and that I’ll keep coming till it’s all right, and they needn’t worry.
Servant: I’ll tell them, if they come back, but I’m not expecting them. They said you’d be here in an hour to make inquires, but I must tell you it’s all night, they will be here on time to meet you.
B. Finish the dialogue
A: Attention, please, I’d like to tell you what to do in the coming sports meeting. Get to school a bit earlier, at 7:30 tomorrow morning.
B: What did she say?
C: (She told us to come to school a bit earlier tomorrow morning, at 7:30.)
A: Please wear your sports clothes.
D: What to wear?
E: (She asked us to wear our sport clothes.)
A: Su Peng, please don’t forget to bring your camera. (You have to take some photos.)
F: Pardon?
A: (I asked you not to forget to bring your camera.) I want you to take some photos
If it is necessary, explain the formation of Indirect and Direct Speech.
2. The Present Continuous Tense.
Fill in the blank with proper words
1). Jack ___ (work) in a network company now, and he ___ (like) it very much.
2). I can hear something outside the door. It ___ (sound) as if someone ___ (try) to open the door.
3). Grandma normally ____(live) with us, but she ____ (spend ) the last month in Hangzhou and ____ (go)to stay with uncle next week.
4). They ____ (play) really wonderfully. I ____ (think) they ____ (win) the game.
5). A: That is Alice. I ____ (not think) you ____ her before.
B: Oh yes. We ____ (know) each other, for we ____ (be) at the same school.
6). She ____ (grow) up in that farmhouse in the village. She ____ (miss) it very much and ____ (return) to have a look this weekend.
7). A: There ____ (be) a great film on this week. It _____ (be) an Oscar Prize winner. They ____ (ask) you to go with them tonight.
B: Thanks, but I ____ (see) it in only yesterday.
8). A: I ____ (try) to phone George, but he ____ (be) not at home.
B: He should be. He ____ (leave) school an hour ago.
Answers: 1). is working; likes 2). sounds; is trying 3). lives; spent; is going 4). are playing; think; will win 5). don’t think; have met/met; know; are 6). grew; miss; is returning 7). is; is; asked; saw 8). Tried; was; left
Then check the exercise with the students.
3. The Attributive Clause:
Read the text below and mark out the Attributive Clause and the noun modified by it. If necessary fill in the proper link pronouns.
Penicillin is a kind of medicine ___ is now widely used in hospital. It has played a very important part in saving those ____ have got serious diseases. But do you know anything about the person ____ discovered it?
Penicillin was discovered by a British scientist, Alexander, ____ was born on Aug. 6, 1881. After graduating from a medical university, he worked in a laboratory, where his research began. After World War I, he continued his research for the substances ____ would cure people without bringing harm to human bodies.
In the autumn of 1928, he found through his experiments that penicillin was not harmful to man but it would stop the growth of many dangerous germs. Fleming wrote a paper in ____ he described penicillin in detail. The paper was published in 1929.
The keys are: that/which who who who that which.
4. The Attributive Clause:
California, ____ official nickname is the Golden State, is one of the faster growing states in the United States. It covers an area of great physical diversity(多样性) ____ ____ uplands dominate the landscape. The first people ____ explored and settled California were the Spaniards, ____ gave Spanish names to its two great cities, Los Angels and San Francisco. 1849 was the year ____ Americans came and so was it the year ____ gold was discovered.
The reason ____ the men ____ made movies came to California was that the weather here is fine. The sun allowed them to take pictures outdoor nearly every day in the year. Hollywood, ____ lies in the northern part of the city of Los Angeles, became the movie capital of the world. When oil was discovered, people came to work in the oil field. World War II was period ____ many large airplane factories were built in California.
California, the coastline ____ ____ is 1,200 miles long on the Pacific Ocean, is also one of the country’s leaders in commercial fishing.
The highest mountain in California is Mt. Whitney, a 14,494-foot-high granite peak, ____ ____ one can look down on Death Valley to the east, the lowest point in the United States.
The answers are: whose, of which, who, who, when, when, why, who, which, when, of/in which, on/from which
Revise the Grammar the related to the above exercises.
Lesson 3
Step 1 Warming-up
Introduction of your good friend:
Get one of the students to give a brief introduction to his or her good friends.
Step 2 Writing
Get the students to write a short composition about their own experience.
Ask the students to read their composition out and go over the basic skills of writing.
Step 3 Reporting
Divide the students into several groups and get them to prepare for the film stars and the movies that they favour.
Get the students to report it out, while trying using some related words and the grammar learned in these unit.
Homework
Write another composition about Being a student with good manners.
篇16：人教版高一下英语教案高一第二十单元(人教版高一英语下册教案教学设计)
Humour
I. Teaching aims and demands 教学目标和要求:
1.Topics 话题
Talk about humour and comedians
2.Function: 交际功能
表达打算和计划(Expressing intensions and plans)
I will... I'm going to... I intend to... I hope to...
I plan/want to... I wish to... I've decide (not) to... I hope not...
We have to make a choice...
3.Vocabulary 重点词汇和短语
humour; humourous; bitter; chalk; couple; minister; circus; intend; stage; nationality; certain; amuse; laughter; accent; actually; typical; tradition; rapid; appreciate; exist; phrase; suffer; operate; direction; brake; cyclist; fortunately; bicycle; silence; rude; confused
4.Grammar:语法
动词-ing形式做定语和宾语补足语（1）
1.能够用动词-ing形式描述人或物品的特性、状态或用途;
2.能够用动词-ing形式描述感官动词后动作或状态.
II. Difficult points
III. Main teaching aids教具：A tape-recorder; Multimedia, projector, role cards
Ⅳ. Main teaching methods 教法：
1. The interaction between the teacher and the students, and among the students themselves; Attention to the students’ listening, speaking, reading and writing; and so on.
2. Listening-and–answering activity to help the students go through with the listening material.
3. Use both individual work and group or pair work to make every student work and think in class
V. Teaching procedure：
Period 1第一节
（一）明确目标
1. Practice saying some tongue twisters. Warming up to arouse the students love in talking.
2. Do some listening to improve the students listening ability.
3. Making simple dialogues to train the students speaking ability.
(二) 整体感知
Step 1 Presentation
Everyone wants and needs to learn how to speak well if we can talk fluently and humorously, we feel we have friendly conversation. Today we will learn to say some tongue twisters and talk about the pictures on the book.
（三）教学过程
Step 2 Warming up
Go through the twisters on the book and ask students to follow.
Deal with the points and talk about the skills of speaking.
Practice the tongue twisters in pairs and then act them out.
Here is another nice tongue twister to practise with the students.
A tutor who tooted a flute
Tried to tutor two tutors to toot
Said the two to the tutor
”Is it harder to toot or
To tutor two tutors to toot?“
Step 3 Listening comprehension
Now let s have some listening training. Ask the students to listen and member, and then talk about the pictures on the book.
Do the exercises after the pictures and then practice them. Make up short dialogues according to the questions.
LISTENING TEXT:
In the dialogue, D = Granddaughter, G = Grandmother
D: Grandmother. How did you meet grandfather? G: Oh well, that's quite a funny story. In fact, we met
several times. You see, I met grandfather in England, where we lived before we came to Australia. We only lived about eight kilometres from each other. Your grandfather was a minister in the church, three villages away.
D: And when did he ask you to marry him?
G: Well, it was really funny. We were having dinner in a restaurant one evening, and we were talking about people getting married, and so on. As a minister in the church it was your grandfather's job to marry couples. We talked about all kinds of different people, sometimes families we both knew. We were having a very enjoyable conversation and laughed a lot. So I asked him, ”And will you marry me?“
He went a little red in the face, and couldn't say anything for a few minutes. He looked rather surprised. Finally, he said, ”Well, this is very sudden and unexpected!“ I immediately realised that he had not understood 11lecorrectly. So I laughed and said ”No! What I mean is, when I get married in church, will you be the minister who marries me and my husband?“ He laughed, and seemed to feel much better after I had said that. We continued our dinner in much the same way as before. We had a very nice evening together.
However, as he later told me, our talk put an interesting idea into his head. He considered what I had said and realised that he had always loved me. He did not understand me because I asked him the question that he had wanted to ask me for some time. So, a few days later he came to visit me at home. It was then that he asked me to marry him. This time it was my turn to feel honoured. But I immediately accepted!
Answers to Exercise 1:
Or in the order of appearance in the book:
Page 50: 6 5 4
Page 51: 3 1 2
Answers to Exercise 2:
1 He was a minister in the church.
2 A minister.
3 About eight kilometres from each other. 4 In a restaurant.
5 A few days later.
Answers to Exercise 3:
There once was a minister who lived three villages away from a young lady. One evening they had dinner together in a restaurant. They talked about people getting married, and the lady asked the minister whether he would marry her in church. The minister was very surprised and said that her question came very unexpected. The lady realised that he had not understood her correctly. What she meant was whether he would marry her and her husband. However, their conversation put an interesting idea into the minister's head. He realised that he wanted to marry her. So a few days later he visited her at home and asked her to marry him. The lady felt honoured and immediately accepted.
Step 4 Speaking practice
Sample interview:
J: For which age do you write your show?
c: I write my show for children but often the parents like my shows too. Some jokes are funny for the children but their deeper meaning is even funnier to the parents.
J: What do you do as a clown?
C: Well, I act funny. I make strange faces and run after animals in the circus. Sometimes I just smile and greet people to our show. I also tell jokes.
J: What are you doing at this moment?
C: Why, I'm talking to you! Hahaha. You mean in my show? I have an act with a donkey. It's very funny really. Many children told me afterwards they think. I'm even more stupid than my donkey. And that is of course just what I want them to feel!
J: What are your plans for your next show?
C: I plan to jump out of a big box that looks like a birthday present and throw candy to the children in the audience. I have decided my next show to be all about happiness. I intend to give my audience a show of about an hour which are all fun. I hope people will go home feeling happier than when they came to the circus.
J: How do you make children laugh?
C: I do funny things and wear clothes of bright colours. The make-up on my face makes my face look funny even though I don't do anything! I have a big red ping-pong ball as a nose, and when I act as if I'm crying, water shoots out of my eyes like rain. Of course the children can't see the little tubes hidden under my hair.
J: When will you stop working as a clown?
C: I will stop working as a clown when my audience no longer thinks I'm funny. But I hope that will never happen.
Sample of a short xiangsheng dialogue in English: (adapted from Guan Lin)
Things that leave you in the dark
A: My kid brother's a sharp little fellow for his age.
He says things that leave you in the dark.
B: That's what you say.
A: We can try it out if you don't believe me.
B: All right. You be him, and I'll ask the questions. A: Fine.
B: Tell me, boy.
A: Yup!
B: How old are you?
A: (in his brother s voice): One year older than last year. B: And how old were you then?
A: One year younger than now.
B: Well, I can see you know a few tricks. How many people are there in your family?
A: As many as there are toothbrushes.
B: And how many toothbrushes are there?
A: One each.
B: It's not easy, is it? Where do you go to school, young fellow?
A: On the north side of the road.
B: Which road?
A: The one outside the south gate of the school.
B: OK. I give up.
（四）总结扩展
Step 5 Necessary language points
Today we ve done some listening and speaking, and learn how to give advice and some everyday English used between doctors and patients.
Listening and speaking听说要点
1>In England, who can marry couples in church?
marry [用法]此处意为‘(牧师等)为...证婚’
couple [用法]n.[C]1. (一)对,(一)双(+of) 2.夫妇;未婚夫妻; 3. 【口】几个,三两个(+of)
[举例]The young couple decided to start their tour immediately.
那对年轻夫妇决定立即开始旅游。
They walked a couple of miles. 他们步行了几英里。
2>Still, I don't think everybody will find my kind of humour funny.
Still [用法]ad. 尽管如此,然而;(虽然...)还是
[举例]He is good-natured；still，I don't like him. 他脾气很好,可是我还是不喜欢他。
3>I intend to do...
intend [用法]想要;打算[+to-v][+v-ing][+(that)]
[举例]Let's ask her what she intends us to do. 让我们问她要我们做什么。
What do you intend to do today? 你今天打算做什么?
Step 6 Summary小结:
Step 7 Homework
Period 2第二节
（一）明确目标
1. Develop the students reading ability, especially their reading comprehension.
2. Read the reading passage and know about Laughing Matter.
3. Learn to interview a person.
（二）整体感知
Step 1 Presentation
Today we come to the Reading. It’s about some laughing matter. Today we are going to learn how to interview somebody. Give an example to the students by asking an excellent student to help.
（三）教学过程
Step 2 Pre-reading discussions
Get the students to read and practice the dialogue in the text.
Work in pairs. Ask one student play the part of a journalist the other a circus down. Make up a dialogue referring to the questions and pictures.
Practice the useful expressions in pairs first, and then act out at class using dialogues or making sentences.
Sample answers for Question 1
Photo 1: The comic duo of the 1930s ”Laurel and Hardy.“ (The thin one is called Stan Laurel, while the stout one is called Oliver Hardy.) They are funny because they are each other's opposites: one fat and one thin; one is clever and one is silly etc.
Photo 2: Mr Bean. Although Mr Rowan Atkinson acts as different comic characters he is most famous around the world as Mr Bean. Mr Bean is funny because he makes funny faces, he acts silly, he seems to be quite stupid, and the things he does are strange.
Photo 3: Dustin Hoffman in the film Tootsie (1982). In this film Hoffman acts the role of a woman, and many . people agree that his performance was so good that you often can't tell the difference. But in the film of course there all kinds of funny moments.
Photo 4: Ma Ji is a well-known artist of crosstalk shows in China. His numerous crosstalk shows always make his audience roar with laughter. Ask the students to talk about Ma Ji themselves in pairs or groups.
Sample answers for Question 2:
Photo 1: Other comic duos are for example, Abbott and Costello, French and Saunders, Wallace.& Gromit or Beavis and Butthead.
Photo 2: Other comedians acting as clowns are for example, Charlie Chaplin, Buster Keaton or Austin Powers.
Photo 3: Other famous comedians who dressed up as women are for example, Dame Edna (Australia), Milton Berle (USA) and Eddy Izzard (UK).
Photo 4: Other famous crosstalk artists are Jiang Kun, Hou Yuewen, Feng Gong, Ma Sanli, Tang Jiezhong, etc.
Sample answers for Question 3:
1 I have seen some films of Laurel and Hardy and I think that they are very funny.
2 I find Mr Bean always very funny.
or: I know some people think it is funny, but I think Mr Bean is very silly.
3 I don't think I ever saw this comedian. I am not sure if I would like it.
4 I once heard Hou Yuewen on the radio and I had to laugh so much that my stomach hurt and I had tears in my eyes.
Step 3 Reading
Read the text carefully again, and give the students some explanations. Do a little quiz by speaking.
1. ----John sends his best wishes. ----________.
A. That’s nice of him B. Oh, he is too police
C. It’s kind of him to say so D. You are really kind to me
2. ---- What do you think sally is like? ----She______
A. isn't in good health B. doesn’t’ like eating too much
C. likes to eat fish D. is very pretty
3. ---- Do you mind my taking this seat? ---- _______
A. Yes, sit down please B. No, of course not
C. Yes, take it please D. No, you can't take it
4. -----Leaving for Chicago? ------_______.
A. Soon B. Lately C. Late D. Sooner
5. -------Excuse me, have you got a light? ______. I don’t smoke.
A. Don’t mention B. Never mind C. I'm afraid not D. Thanks a lot
1. A 2.D 3.B 4.A 5.C
Ste Para. 1: - Ask students about famous Chinese and Western comedies.
Comedies:
- Ways of dressing or behaving.
- Stereotypes of people from different countries (including China)
- Funny accents (foreign, local or in certain jobs)
- Examples of word play.
Para. 2: Clowns: - Ask about different Chinese and Western clowns
- Ways of dressing, make-up
- Examples of jokes, fun
Para. 3: Comedians: - Ask about different Chinese and Western comedians.
- Mime, body language, facial expressions
- Retell famous sketches for comedy shows.
Para. 4: Crosstalk: - Ask about different crosstalk shows.
- In which way do crosstalk artists make people laugh?
- Ask students to give some famous ex amples of rhyme, rhythm and tongue twisters from
Chinese crosstalk shows (in Chinese).
p 4 Listening to the reading passage
Play the tape for the students to listen and follow. Play the tape for the students to listen and follow. Pay attention to the pronunciation and intonation.
Step 5 Post-reading
Answers to Exercise 1:
1 The tradition of crosstalk has existed in China for more than 2,000 years.
2 1 cross-dressing 2 stereotypes 3 word play
3 Some of Shakespeare's plays are not so funny for us because we don't understand the language and word play that Shakespeare used.
4 A clown is a funny person, usually dressed up in wide clothes of very bright colours, such as red and yellow. They often wear a big coloured wig. Their face is covered with white make-up, and their mouth and eyes are made to look very big using red and other coloured make-up. Clowns often have a big red nose. All of their clothes, including their shoes are usually over-sized.
5 The show of a comedian is more like a comedy than like a clown. A comedian doesn't wear any of the funny clothes and make-up of clowns. The humour of clowns is often very silly. Clowns often don't speak at all. Their jokes are almost all body language, mime, and silly things like falling down. The comedian, on the other hand uses all the richness of the language to create fun, just as in comedies. In fact, comedians often act out little sketches which make us think of acting on the stage in comedy.
6 Various answers are possible.
Answers to Exercise 2:
Sample TV show format:
One way to do this is by creating a show for CCTV-9 about a faJIrily from Australia living in Beijing. The family comes from a little town near a huge desert in western Australia. The father grew up in the ”bush.“ The mother grew up in Sydney. But neither of their children has ever visited a city and now they are living in a very large one in China. So the humour is in how this family tries to adjust to both big city life and life in a foreign culture. The husband and wife are managers for a company that produces milk. They have two children: a son of 14 and a daughter of 9. Neither child likes to drink milk but they must pretend to enjoy it every time they'
go somewhere to promote their product. Also, neither child likes vegetables but many Chinese dishes include vegetables. Their mother tries to get them to like vegetables but, unfortunately, their father doesn't like them much either. To make matters worse, none of them speaks Chinese. The son's hobby is throwing a boomerang around, but this causes problems whenever he goes to a park where kites are flying. The daughter's hobby is riding a moped but she always does it in the bicycle lanes. The other family is Chinese. Both the father and mother are also managers at the same milk company. It is a Joint-Venture, or a JV company. The father comes from a farmer's family in Inner Mongolia. The mother comes from a professor's family in Shanghai. They often argue about whether life is better in the city or the countryside, just like the Australian parents. They also have a boy who only likes milk in ice cream drinks and refuses to drink it warm. His hobby is skateboarding.
The first episode, or part, of the show is about the day that the Australian family arrives in Beijing and is greeted at the airport by the Chinese family.
（四）总结扩展
Step 6 Summary 小结
Step 7 Homework
Period 3第三节
（一）明确目标
1. Learn about the useful words and expression in the reading text.
2. Learn how to use ”had better“, ”should“ and ”ought to“ while giving advice.
3. Discuss the answers to all the exercises in the Students’Book.
（二）整体感知
Step 1 Presentation
In this class we’ll first go through the text and learn to use some language points. And then we’ll discuss the exercises together with each other.
（三）教学过程
Step 2 Language points in the reading text
1>The actors makes us laugh by making fun of somebody's way of dressing or telling an amusing story.
make fun of [用法]取笑
[举例]They made fun of his funny voice. 他们拿他的怪嗓音取笑。
amusing [用法]a.1. 有趣的,好玩的 2. 引人发笑的
[举例]It was amusing to watch the trained elephants perform.
观看受过训练的大象表演很有趣。
He told amusing jokes after dinner. 他在饭后讲了几则令人捧腹的笑话。
2>It sounds funny to hear foreigners speak with an accent.
accent [用法]n.1. 重音;重音符号 2. 口音,腔调 3. 语调,声调 4. 强调,着重(+on)
[举例]Judging by her accent, she must be a Southerner. 从她的口音判断,她准是南方人。
The Government put the accent on light industry. 政府注重轻工业。
3>It is their clothes, make-up and the way they walk that makes people laugh.
make-up [比较]n.1. 构成;构造 2. 性格;气质;体质 3. 化妆;装扮;化妆品 4. [美][口]补考
[举例]the make-up of a committee 委员会的结构
He has a stolid make-up. 他性情执拗。
She seldom puts on make-up. 她很少化妆。
4>A few minutes later everybody is quiet, listening and thinking about the comedian's words.
listening and thinking [用法]动词的-ING形式做伴随状语,表示同步于句子谓语的动作.
[举例]Singing a pop song in a low voice, the girl came into the yard.
这姑娘低声哼着流行歌曲,走进院子.
5>Typical for China is the crosstalk show, where a pair of comedians entertain the audience with word play.
Typical for China is the crosstalk show,...
[用法]此为倒装句,表语提前了。主要是因为主语比较长,为了保持句子平衡才倒装的。
entertain [用法]vt.1. 使欢乐,使娱乐 2. 招待,款待(+with/at/to) vi.1. 款待,请客
[举例]We were all entertained by his humorous stories. 他的幽默故事使我们大家都很开心。
They often entertained their friends at weekends. 他们常在周末招待朋友。
6>Dating back to the Qin Dynasty, the traditional crosstalk shows have made people roar with laughter for centuries.
date back to [用法]固定短语，解释为‘可追溯到...；是...时代开始有的'
[举例]The manuscript dates back to the 18th century. 这个手迹是十八世纪的.
7>Skilled artists make use of all the richness of the spoken language to creat a rapid flow of fun.
a rapid flow of [用法]某事物的连续或持续供应
[举例]cut off the flow of oil 切断石油输送
the constant flow of information 源源不断的信息
8>Their talk includes rhythm and rhyming word as well as tongue twisters, which often make the audience applaud.
applaud [用法]vt.1. 向...鼓掌;向...喝彩 2. 称赞;赞成 vi.1. 鼓掌欢迎;喝彩
[举例]The audience applauded the singer for three minutes. 观众向歌唱家鼓掌喝彩达三分钟。
We applauded him for his courage. 我们称赞他的勇敢。
Everyone stood up to applaud. 全体起立鼓掌。
9>If you are not fluent in Chinese, you will not catch all of it.
catch [用法]理解;听清楚
[举例]Robbie didn't catch what the teacher said. 罗比没有听清楚老师说的话。
10>How long has the tradition of crosstalk existed in China?
exist [用法]vi.1. 存在 2. 生存;生活[(+on)]
[举例]That word doesn't exist in English. 英语中没有这个字。
She existed only on milk. 她只靠牛奶生存。
Step 3 Practice: Vocabulary
1 Bitter 2 Intend 3 Western, Tradition
4 Certain 5 Type / Typical / Stereotype 6 Art / Artist 7 Rapid 8 Richness
1 这位喜剧演员讲笑话时 , 不难从他的声音中感受到一丝苦涩。
2 我来时是准备留下的 , 不过现在我已决定离开。
3 越来越多的西方人迷上了传统中药。
4 目前我们还不能肯定地说这是否会成为一部成功的电影。
5 相声一般由两个人表演 , 在中国很受欢迎
6 南希来自艺术氛围很浓厚的家庭 , 是一位很棒的画家。
7 这本书的作者在奥普拉的访谈节目中接受了采访, 之后他的书很快便售完了。
8 学说外语能丰富人生经历。
Step 4 Practice: Grammar
Answers to Exercise 1:
激烈的争论 激动人心的夜晚 拐杖 咆哮的暴风雨 冉冉升起的太阳 手术台 笑脸 受苦的农民 建筑材料 放飞的风筝 下周 更衣室 有趣的相声 跳舞的女孩 饮用水
Note:In English the words boy and gid are no mIally only used when spe 政 ing about children under the age of 18.People in the age above that do not talk about themselves as boys or girls.Therefore,all sentences d the type ”the boy getting married,,are incorrect,because people usually get married at m age when they are no longer called boys and girls.
Answers to Exercise 2:
There are more than 100possible sentences combining the words and phrases into sentences.Below,only a few samples are given.
1 The boy coming to dinner this evening is a classmate of mine.
2 The boy singing now can play four musical instruments.
3 The person getting married is a friend of my mother's.
4 The person getting married is in his forties.
5 The comedian getting married can play four musical instruments.
6 The comedian performing the show is a friend of my mother’s.
7 The comedian singing now can play four musical instruments.
8 The woman performing the show writes her songs herself.
9 The woman singing now writes her songs herself.
10 That tourist coming to dinner this evening is in his forties.
11The couple getting married are famous film stars.
Answers to Exercise 3:
1 breaking 2 laughing 3 dropping 4 performing 5 shouting 6 cycling 7 burning 8 sharing
Notes:
1 Despite the fact that the identity of the car driveris
already revealed in Paragraph 2,that is not the cli- max.Paragraph 2raises the readers expectations to the highest possible summit:what will happen next? So,the function of Paragraph 2is still building up towards the climax.
Besides beingamny,the story also shows us 由 atdif- ficult or awkward situations cm sometimes be over- come through humour.
（四）总结扩展
Step 5 Summary
Have we ever tiled to make snacks or seen our mother make snacks. Let’s try to write the recipe for your favorite dish. Before writing, you should read Tips first.
Step 6 Homework
Period 4 第四节
（一） 明确目标
1. Review the language points learnt last period.
2. Get the students to know about comedies and humor.
3. Get the students to know more about the funny plays.
3. Do some writing to develop the students writing skill.
(二) 整体感知
Step 1 Presentation
Questions: Do you know some comedians?
Do you know some comedy plays?
Today we are going to read a text about language matter.
（三）教学过程
Step 1 Question the students on some language points
Step 2 Integrating skills
We have learnt how to give advice. Now let’s try to write letters giving advice. Here in our textbook there are letters asking for some advice. Read them quickly, then write down four pieces of advice for each of them using “had better (not) , ”ought (not) to or should (not) .
Many students like having snacks. Is the habit good or bad? Let s read “Snacks“.
Step 3 Listening to the Passage
Step 4 Reading comprehension
After fast reading, do the following True-or-False exercises.
Answers to Exercise 1:
1 The car driver was careless and caused an accidenl.
2 The writer next met the driver at ajob interview.
3 The writer means that she shouted at the car ddvef without giving Mm a chance to say anything. She means that she once told her manager exactly what she thought of him,but she doeskt admit thai it was before he became her boss.
4 Instructions:Ask the students to read the story and explain in their own words what happened. Next ask them about the stmcture of the story-Which paragraphs keep the reader in suspense?(Paragraph 1).Which p 旺 a- graph contains the climax?(Paragraph 3).What is the function of Paragraph 4?(Extending the funny e 旺 ect and success of the previous paragraph).
Give the students some explanations when necessary.
Step 5 Writing
Now let s have some listening training.
（四）总结扩展
Step 6 Necessary language points
Today we ve done some listening and speaking, and learn how to give advice and some everyday English used between doctors and patients.
1>The story of how I got my new job and came to be on such good terms with my boss is a funny one.
came to be on such good terms [用法]1. come to 终于...,开始...[+to-v]
2. be on good terms (with sb) 和某人关系好
[举例]I came to realize that he was right. 我终于认识到他是对的。
2>A yellow car passed me and suddenly cut in right in front of me, as there was another car coming in the other direction.
cut in [用法]1. 插话 2. 超车
[举例]Don't try to cut in while others are talking. 别人谈话时不要插嘴。
in the other direction [注意]朝...方向,本短语的介词用in, 而不是to.
3>I was still so angry that I went up to tell him what I thought of him.
what I thought of him [用法]what和think of搭配,用来询问对某人或某事的看法
[举例]What did you think of the film we saw yesterday? 你对昨天看的电影怎么看?
4>I cycled in front of him, got off my bicycle and laid it down in front of his car so that he couldn't drive off.
cycle [用法]见高一上册unit 14
drive off [用法]开车走
[举例]Would you drive her off in your car? 你能否开车送她走?
5>I told him that he had knocked two people off their bicycles and had nearly caused a bad accident.
knock...off [用法]撞倒;打掉
[举例]The little girl knocked the glass off by accident. 小女孩不小心碰落了玻璃杯。
6>Then I pick up my bicycle and rode on.
pick up [用法](1) 拾起；抱起 (2) （无意中）学会 (3)见到；听出，收听到 (4) 搭载
[举例]The children picked up many sea shells at the seashore. 孩子们在海边捡到许多贝壳。
In that way I'll be able to pick up some theoretical knowledge too.
这样我也能学到一些理论知识。
7>Fortunately, I was on time for the interview.
on time for [用法]刚好赶上,类似in time for
8>We looked at each other for a moment in great surprise and total silence.
in surprise and silence [用法]in surprise: 诧异地 in silence: 默默地
[举例]”A farmer?“ said the Frenchman in surprise. “农夫？”法国人惊奇地说。
9>I decided to look on the whole matter as a great joke.
look on...as [用法]把...看作
[联想]类似意思的用法
11>I remember that the last time we met I did most of the talking, so...
the last time [用法]在这里做连词使用
12>Two days later I received a letter offering me the job.
offering me the job [用法]现在分词短语做定语。分词的内容将是高一最后几单元的重点也是难点，所以，课文中的的相关实例都要特别留意。
13>I was pleased that the manager had decided not to be angry with me for having been so rude.
having been so rude [用法]ing形式的完成式，表示动作先于谓语动词发生。
14>Now I make jokes about it and say to everyone that I dare tell my manager exactly what I think of him.
dare tell [用法]dare做情态动词用时，通常不用于肯定句，除了dare say。dare tell的用法并不多见。
[举例]I dare say it will rain today. 我认为今天要下雨。
I dare say you're thirsty after all that tennis. 打了这么半天网球，你也许渴了吧。
I dare say he will arrive tonight. 我想他今晚会到达。
Step 7 Homework
Period 5 第五节
（一）明确目标
1. Do some listening to improve the students listening ability.
2. Making simple dialogues to train the students speaking ability.
（二）整体感知
Step 1 Presentation
Today we come to the Workbook and do the listening comprehension and also do some talking practice.
（三）教学过程
Step 2 Listening comprehension
LISTENING TEXT:
In the dialogues, I = Interviewer A = Mr Atkinson
I: Mr Atkinson, you are most famous for two comedies. In one of them you playa smart official in old England, while in the other you playa very silly man called Mr Bean. The first programme is very popular in England and America, but not much in other countries. Why?
A: The programme Blackadder in which I play the official in old England, is very interesting. That is the time of Shakespeare. It helps if you have some idea of English history when you watch it. And you need a good understanding of English because it's full of jokes and funny ways of saying things in English. Language is very important. If you are not English, I think it is sometimes quite difficult to follow. The Spanish don't like it so much.
I: But they love Mr Bean. Why is that?
A: Mr Bean is very popular worldwide. I don't know why that is. In Mr Bean hardly any words are spoken. But only leaving out the words does not make it . an international success. You cannot say ”Ob he's not saying anything, therefore the French will love it.“ But, for some reason the French, the Spanish, and the Canadians or whatever do like Mr Bean. They recognise something of themselves in him. Mr Bean is as popular around the world as he is in Britain” I never thought I could make Germans laugh, but Mr Bean has done it. Even the Japanese find him funny.“
I: Well, thank you for Mr Bean and thank you for talking with us.
A: My pleasure. Thank you very much for your time.
Thank you.
Answers to Exercise 1:
1 comedies, audience, language, culture, success, Germans
Answers to Exercise 2:
1 The title of the comedy that almost everybody likes is Mr Bean.
2
Blackadder
1 Set in England at the time of Shakespeare.
2 You need to understand English very well.
3 You need to know quite a lot about English history.
Mr Bean
1 Set in present day England.
2 You don't need to understand English.
3 You don't need to know much about England.
2 Spanish people don't like Blackadder very much because it is difficult for them to follow.
Or: Because they don't know enough about English history.
Or: Because their English is not good enough.
3 Even the Germans and Japanese like to watch Mr Bean because they recognise something of themselves in him.
Answers to Exercise 3:
1 Mr Atkinson is most famous for his roles in two popular comedies.
2 One of them is set in the time of Shakespeare, while the other is set in present day England.
3 To understand the first you need to have good En glish and some idea of English history.
4 While in the first show language is very important, in the other hardly any words are spoken.
5 But that is not the only reason why it is an international success.
6 It is popular around the world because anyone can recognise something of himself in Mr Bean.
Step 3 Talking practice
Sample reactions:
I A woman falls over a banana peel. I think that isn't very funny, because she could hurt herself.
2 Two boys are hiding 'behind some low trees. They have put a wallet on the street, which is tied to a string. When somebody walks by and sees the .wallet, he or she will be very happy to find money. They will bend to pick up the wallet. Then, the boys will pull the string a little, so the man just cannot reach the wallet. He must take another step and bend again to pick up the wallet. Of course, he can never get it because the boys will each time pull the string. I think although this is quite funny for young boys to play, it is im--P,olite to others.
3 Three young boys have tied some empty cans and tins to the tail of a dog. When the dog starts running, the cans make a lot of noise, so the dog will be afraid and start running even harder. It also makes a lot of noise. I don't think this is very funny. It is teasing the dog.
Step 4 Sample talking
Step 5 Summary 小结
Step 7 Homework
Period 6 第六节
（一）明确目标
1. Discuss all the answers to the exercises in the Workbook.
2. Learn to use the grammar knowledge
3. Further develop the students’ writing skills.
（二）整体感知
Step 1 Presentation
In the class
（三）教学过程
Step 2 Vocabulary
Answers to Exercise 1:
1 couple 2 laughter 3 confuse 4 circus 5 stage 6 humour 7 accent 8 brake
Answers to Exercise 2:
I How could the man drive off after hitting the school
girl that walked across the street?
2 You would feel better about failures if you look on
every one of them as a lesson in your life to teach you how to get better.
3 Don't make fun of me when I'm not feeling well.
4 In tonight's all-star concert, we'll see a couple of singers from Hong Kong or Taiwan.
5 He intended to go to Hainan for the holiday, but then he changed Ms mind and went to Qingdao instead.
Answers to Exercise 3:
1Funny 2mostly 3amuse 4typical 5existed 6entertainment 7laughter 8humour 9attractive 10Actually 11nationa1ities12appreciate
Step 3 Grammar
Answers to Exercise 1:
1 正在台上表演的两位喜剧演员来自辽宁。
2 那个正在河边走的女孩是谁 ?
3 拉小提琴的这些孩子下星期将举行一次表演。
4 站在小车旁边那个戴太阳镜的人是一位相声表演 艺术家。
5 正在和孩子们谈话的那位老太太是一位著名的音 乐家。
6 我看见一队警察从一部绿色的吉普车中出来 , 跑向那栋房子。
7 我看见一只嘴里衔着一块肉的狗进了你的花园。
8 我昨晚在晚会上听到她唱了一首动听的歌。
9 在公园看到有人在玩蛇时 , 我吓坏了。
10 有几个男孩子在我的窗户底下又喊又叫 , 弄得我 睡不成觉。
Answers to Exercise 2:
Part A:
a washing machine a swimming pool a writing desk a waiting room a dancing hall reading materials writing paper an opening speech a dressing mirror building materials a bathing cap drinking water a dressing/changing room a training class a sleeping car an operating table smiling face a hiding place
Part B:
1 It is bad manners to make fun of/laugh at somebody's appearance and his or her way of dressing.
2 Dating back to the Oin Dynasty, the traditional xiangsheng show is still one of the main Chinese art forms to entertain people.
3 It is very interesting to watch these o1d men playing cards.
4 I heard the couple next door quarelling all the night.
5 I saw a boy picking flowers in your garden.
Sample answer for Exercise 3:
I noticed a young lady climbing out of the window. I saw her jumping over the fence. Then I saw her asking a passer-by where the post office was. I followed her and saw her entering the post office and writing a message. I saw her paying with a ring and then leaving the post office. I kept following her. I saw her coming to a bridge, leaving her bag on the road and start fishing. Then I saw the Emperor coming that way in a carriage. I saw her swinging her fishing rod and her fishhook catching in the Emperor's coat. To my horror, I saw her taking out a knife and trying to cut the hook. But to my even greater surprising, I saw the Emperor talking and walking with the girl five minutes later, as if they had been old friends.
Step 4 Integrating skills
We have learnt how to give advice. Now let’s try to write letters giving advice. Here in our textbook there are letters asking for some advice. Read them quickly, then write down four pieces of advice for each of them using ”had better (not) , “ought (not) to or should (not) .
Many students like having snacks. Is the habit good or bad? Let s read “Snacks”.
Step 5 Listening to the Passage
Step 6 Reading comprehension
After fast reading, do the following True-or-False exercises.
Answers to the Exercises:
1 The pairs of rhyming words are as follows. For each pair two more rhyming words are suggested.
1 house & mouse bows, cows
2 mouse & house blouse, greenhouse
3 honey & money funny, sunny
4 dinner & thinner inner, winner
5 muffin & stuffin' roughin' , bluffin'
6 well & tell smell, bell
7 town & down brown, clown
8 found & around sound, pound
9 west & rest . test, best
10 sage & page age, stage
11 sits & bits spirits, visits
12 small & all ball, fall
13 time & climb rhyme, crime
14 look & book took, hook
15 in & stuffin' coughin', bluffin'
16 shook & book cook, shook
17 down & town brown, clown
18 stuffin' & muffin roughin', bluffin'
19 door & more floor, before
2 The writer plays a joke on the word sage. In the beginning of the poem, the word sage means spice, a plant used when cooking, to make food tastier. But later in the poem, the word sage means an old wise man. The funny thing in the poem is that the two old friends want to get some sage, to cut it or him into pieces and serve that for dinner.
Step 7 Sample writng
Many humourous poems, and many of the poems Edward Lear is famous for are nonsense verses. The things that happen in the poems are very funny, but none of it is true or could happen in reality. With the right choice of words, choosing original combinations of nouns and verbs, nonsense can be very funny. The funny poem in the writing is a simple type of funny nonsense poem. The poem is based on a very famous English nursery rhyme.
I saw a fishpond all on fire;
I saw a house bow to a squire;
I saw a parson twelve feet high;
I saw a cottage near the sky;
I saw a balloon, made of lead;
I saw a coffin drop down dead;
I saw a sparrow run a race;
I saw two horses making lace;
I saw a girl just like a cat;
I saw a kitten wear a hat;
I saw a man who saw them too,
And says, though strange, they all are true.
（四）总结扩展
Step 5 Summary
Have we ever tiled to make snacks or seen our mother make snacks. Let’s try to write the recipe for your favorite dish. Before writing, you should read Tips first.
4. Workbook
1>One of the films is set in the time of Shakespeare.
set [用法]为(小说、舞台等)设置背景
[举例]The play is set in 15th-century Italy. 这出戏以十五世纪的意大利为背景。
2>Apart from rhyme, the writer plays a joke with a word that has two different meanings.
Apart from [用法]除开;除...之外
[举例]There are ten people in the queue, apart from me. 除了我，还有十个人在排队。
This is a good composition, apart from a few grammar mistakes.
除了几处语法错误，这篇作文很好。
Step 7 Homework
Period 7 第七节
1． 检查本单元单词、短语及相关句型。
2． 讲评统一布置的课外基础练习。
篇17：人教版高一下英语教案高一第十九单元(人教版高一英语下册教案教学设计)
Modern Agriculture
I. Teaching aims and demands 教学目标和要求:
1.Topics 话题
Talk about modern agriculture and its effects on people s life
2.Function: 交际功能
提建议和做决定(Giving advice and making decisions)
In my opinion, you should... I think he is right...
If I were you... Wouldn’t it be better if...?
We cant t do both, so... The other idea sounds better to me...
As far as I can see the best thing would be to...
We have to make a choice...
3.Vocabulary 重点词汇和短语
protection; technique; irrigation; pump; seed; technical; import; production; root;insect; tobacco; golden; method; tie; discovery; garden; gardening; gardener; wisdom; practical; guide; firstly; sow; condition; soil; weed; remove; sunflower; generation
depend on; and so on
4.Grammar:语法
It的用法(2)---强调句中某一成分
能够运用英语的强调句型，引起他人对下列内容的关注：
1.事情的执行者---强调句子的主语
2.动作的对象或内容---强调句子的宾语)包括介词宾语)
3.事情发生的时间或地点---强调句子的时间或地点等状语
II. Difficult points
III. Main teaching aids教具：A tape-recorder; Multimedia, projector, role cards
Ⅳ. Main teaching methods 教法：
1. The interaction between the teacher and the students, and among the students themselves; Attention to the students’ listening, speaking, reading and writing; and so on.
2. Listening-and–answering activity to help the students go through with the listening material.
3. Use both individual work and group or pair work to make every student work and think in class
V. Teaching procedure：
Period 1第一节
（一）明确目标
1. To learn to read statistical graphs. Warming up to arouse the students love in talking.
2. Do some listening to improve the students listening ability.
3. Making simple dialogues to train the students speaking ability.
(二) 整体感知
Step 1 Presentation
With the time passing by, people’s living standard is becoming higher and higher. As a result their eating habits have charged a lot. Today we are going to know some details about it by watching the graphs.
（三）教学过程
Step 2 Warming up
Go through the questions by discussing in small groups with the help of the graphs. Learn with language point at the same time. Present the results form each groups.
Sample answers for question 1:
1 People are earning more money, so they want to buy and eat more meat.
2 People learn more about healthy food, so they want to eat more fruit.
3 Fruit-based alcohol such as wine is better for your health than spirits, so people want to drink more
wine and less spirits.
4 Fruit juices are healthier than soft drinks such as cola or sprite, so people want to drink more juices.
5 Eating fish doesn't make people as fat as eating meat, so people like eating more fish.
6 When people have more money, they start buying more candy and soft drinks such as cola and sprite; there is a lot of sugar in these products.
7 When people eat more fish and meat, they need more oil to fry fish and meat, so more oil need to be made.
8 As the population of China grows, more grain (rice and wheat) will be needed, even though each person eats less of it. Some of the grain produce is also used to feed pigs, sheep and cattle.
Sample answers for question 2:
Agricultural produce has changed over the past 20 years. China now produces almost 80% more fish and fruit than twenty years ago. The produce of meat over the same period is up about 60%. Oil and sugar are up about 30% each. Grain and cotton are up 10 and 15% respectively. For further sample answers see introduction to this exercise. These changes happen for different reasons.
1 People want to buy different products, so farmers need to grow different things. (Changes in demand)
2 Farmers want to make more money. When they can grow extra crops or other crops on their land or land which they can't use to grow grain, they will for example plant fruit trees. In the end, they will bring more fruit to the market. (Changes in supply)
3 Some crops bring in more money than other crops, so some farmers change their produce from growing grain to for example fish farming or growing fruit. In the end, they will bring more fish or fruit to the market. (Changes in supply)
4 If farmers produce more meat (pigs or chickens) they , need more animal feed. Besides grass, they will also feed them grain products. So they need to buy more grain, which other farmers need to grow more. (Changes in demand)
Sample answers for question 3:
Changes in eating habits and diets will cause changes to agriculture and may also have both good and bad effects for nature.
1 First, Chinese people are eating more meat. Next, farmers have to raise more pigs, sheep and cattle. So, more grass is needed to feed more sheep and cattle. So, farmers need more grassland. Possibly, they will cut down trees to take more land on which to grow grass.
2 If farmers need to raise more pigs, they need to feed the pigs more food. Next, farmers need to buy more grain to feed the pigs. So, other farmers need to grow more grain. They need more land to grow more grain or they must grow more grain on their land. They would destroy nature if farmers want to use more land. They may need to use methods that are harmful to the environment.
3 If farmers want to grow different crops they would plant them together. This can be very good for the soil.
4 First people start eating more fish. Then, farmers have to start fish farms and produce more fish. So, farmers have to choose land they can use to turn into fishponds. If farmers use land for fishponds that could not be used for farming, they create more farmland. If in this way farmers can make more and better use of the land, this will help to develop the economy.
5 When people want to eat more fruit, farmers will have to produce more fruit. Many farmers plant fruit trees beside their fields or in places where they cannot grow other crops. In this way farmers make better use of the land, and this will help to develop the economy.
6 First farmers want to grow more different products, because in this way they can make more money. Next, they will plant fruit trees around their fields or around their fishponds. Also, they will plant trees or crops in places where nothing grew before. Sometimes, they will also change barren land into fishponds. In the end, there will be more variation. The flowers on the fruit trees will attract bees and other insects. Next, the trees will protect the crops from strong winds and hot sunshine. As a result, the environment will benefit from farms with more variation in crops and land use.
Step 3 Listening comprehension
Now let’s have some listening training.
LISTENING TEXT
Farming and nature are like two flowers on the same tree. When farming goes against nature, all kinds of environmental problems are the result. In ancient times, when people began using the land, farming was not as it is today. Early farmers moved around the country. They burnt a part of a forest and used this land for one or two years. When they could no longer grow crops on the land they moved on and repeated this somewhere else. Agriculture in this way destroys nature and results in floods and droughts. Some people in South America still practise this kind of farming.
Over the past twenty to twenty-five years, farmers have recognised some old truths, already known to ancient Chinese farmers. Farming should not go against nature. If the soil is too poor, chemicals can help improve it and grow better crops, but this may damage or destroy land surrounding the farms. Instead, farmers should look for other methods. In the early 16th century, brothers Tan and Xiao Zao of Jiangsu Province cheaply bought fields along lakes nobody wanted because they were too wet. They built dikes around the fields turning the fields into fish ponds and they became fish farmers. They also planted fruit trees on the dikes and kept chickens and ducks. They were very successful farmers.
Answers to Exercise 1:
History of farming farmers in China Protection of nature trees Environmental problems dikes
Answers to Exercise 2:
1 True 2 False 3 False 4 True 5 False
Answers to Exercise 3:
1 (all kinds of) environmental problems 2 destroyed 3 floods 4 droughts 5 farming
6 go against nature 7 too wet8 farming / growing wheat / growing crops 9 fishponds
10 fish / ducks / chickens ll fruit trees
Step 4 Speaking practice
Sample dialogue:
A: Here we have a nice piece of land, and I think the best we could do is grow rice. Rice is an important product and we can make good money growing rice. Another reason why I think we should grow rice is that the soil is very good for rice and there is plenty of water for irrigation.
B: Well, I disagree. I think it would be wrong to grow rice. We should grow more sugarcane in our area, because sugarcane is easier to grow. There are plans to build a sugar factory near the town and that would bring many jobs to this region. Sugarcane can be grown without much work. There are already many rice farms in the area. Adding another sugarcane farm may make the factory owner decide to build his new factory here. .
A: Yes. I have heard about these plans, but it's far from sure that the factory will be built here. If not, then the sugarcane must be transported to the next town, which would not be very good. As far as I can see the best thing to do would be to plant that field with rice.
D: Well, I don't think any of you is right. We have to make a choice, and in my opinion we should raise pigs. Agricultural products such as sugarcane and rice are produced by many farmers around here. Therefore the prices are low. We'd better use the land to raise pigs.
C: Wouldn't it be better to plant trees on the land because a lot of wood has been destroyed over the past forty years and we have to protect the environment. We should give something back to nature. Besides, we could cut down some bf the trees after a few years and sell the wood.
D: No. That would be a, waste of ground and money. We have to make use of the land. The land area is too small for any real crop growing, and you would only be able to plant just a few trees. We have to make a choice. Pig raising doesn't need a lot of space and it can be a way to make a lot of money.
A: You are right about the size of the land. There isn't much we can do with it because it's too small. But I agree with C that the environment in our province has had a lot to suffer. Wouldn't it be better_ as C suggests to just leave that piece of land as it is, or as she says plant some trees on it.
….
（四）总结扩展
Step 5 Necessary language points
Today we ve done some listening and speaking, and learn how to give advice and some everyday English used between doctors and patients.
Listening and speaking听说要点
1>How are people s eating habits changing over the years?
over the years [用法]此处over意为‘在...期间’
[举例]My grandchildren will stay over Christmas. 我的孙儿孙女们圣诞节期间将呆在这儿。
2>How has agricultural produce changed during these years?.
produce [用法]n.[U] 农产品
[举例]The farmer brought his produce to the market. 农民把他的农产品带到市场。
My cousin sells her garden produce in the market. 我表姐在市场上卖自己菜园里的蔬菜。
This shop sells native produce. 这家商店出售土特产品。
3>Next, farmers have to raise more pigs, sheep and cattle.
raise [用法]vt. 饲养;
[举例]They increased their income by raising silkworms and so on. 他们靠养蚕等增加了收入。
He is a farmer and raises horses. 他是农民，又养马。
cattle [用法]n. 牛；牲口；家畜
[举例]Cattle feed on grass. 牛以草为食。
They keep a large herd of cattle. 他们饲养着一大群牛。
That is a cattle farm. 那是畜牧场。
beef(=feeder) cattle 肉牛 dairy cattle 奶牛
[注意]cattle是复数含义.几头牛可以说: three head of cattle
4>Listen carefully to all the group members,take notes of the reasons they give and help to make a good decision.
note [用法]笔记
[举例]I must look at my notes. 我得看看我的笔记。
Please take notes of the lecture. 请做听课笔记。
compare notes 对笔记；交换意见
Step 6 Summary小结:
Step 7 Homework
Period 2第二节
（一）明确目标
1. Develop the students reading ability, especially their reading comprehension.
2. Read the reading passage and know about the differences between traditional agriculture and modern one in china meanwhile any necessary common knowledge about fertilization and irrigation.
3. To encourage the students to learn more for the future of our country.
（二）整体感知
Step 1 Presentation
Today we come to the Reading. It’s about the differences between traditional agriculture and modern one in china meanwhile any necessary common knowledge about fertilization and irrigation. Let’s look at the pictures and reconstruct the text by comparing traditional and modern farming.
（三）教学过程
Step 2 Pre-reading discussions
Answers to Exercise 1:
The first picture shows a farmer sitting in the courtyard, in front of the house. There is a basket in front of her and two chickens that eat from the basket. On this farm, chickens can walk freely in the yard.
The picture below shows a large building in which thousands of chickens sit in small cages. On this farm, chickens sit in cages inside a building.
The second picture shows a pile of animal shit (manure). The picture below shows a bag of chemical fertiliser.
The third picture show a farmer working on the land with two animals. The animals pull the plough to work the land.
The picture below shows a tractor. In this picture, the farmers use the tractor to work the land.
The fourth picture shows dry, barren land. The earth is so dry that nothing can grow there.
The picture below shows a greenhouse, where plants grow in a building .made of glass.
Answers to Exercise 2:
Ask the students to discuss the advantages and disadvantages of modern farming; they can also think of the advantages and disadvantages of the old ways of farming.
Raising chickens
Small scale Large scale
The farmer can keep only a few chickens. The farmer can keep thousands of chickens.
It does not cost a lot to keep the chickens. It costs a lot of money to keep the chickens.
It is not a lot of work to keep the chickens. It's a lot of work to keep the chickens: feeding, cleaning etc.
The chickens don't have many problems. If chickens get ill, many die or must be killed.
The chickens are not so fat. The chickens are big and fat.
The eggs and meat taste very good. The meat and eggs do not taste so good.
The chickens are free. The chickens are not free.
The farmer can sell the chicken dung
Fertilisers
Natural fertiliser (manure; also dung) Chemical fertiliser
It's free or can be bought at low prices.
It is a lot of work to mix it with the soil.
It has a bad smell.
It takes a lot of place to store.
It is difficult to transport. It's expensive.
It is not a lot of work to mix it with the soil. It has no smell.
It takes little place to store.
It is easy to transport.
Animals (buffalo; also ox) Machines (Tractor) Horsepower
They are not so expensive. They are expensive.
The “fuel” is cheap (grass, hay etc). The fuel is expensive (gasoline).
They don't pollute the air. They pollute the air.
They can be used on different terrain; eg hill slopes or They can only be used on flat (level) and dry terrain.
wet ground. They don't need to rest.
They need to rest sometimes. You can use them for 5-20 or more years if you can get
You can use them for about 10-20 years. enough spare (repair) parts.
If they get young ones, you get more for free.
If they totally “break down”, you can eat them.
Climate control
Open air Greenhouse
If the weather conditions are bad you can loose the crops.
The landscape is more beautiful.
The land must be good for farming (arable land).
Weather conditions are controlled, so they cannot damage crops.
It is expensive to build and operate (gas, water, electricity) a greenhouse.
If there is a power failure, you may lose crops.
The landscape is ugly:
Greenhouses can be built where the land is not suitable for farming.
1950s - 1980s 1980s - present
The use of machines eg tractors The use of greenhouses
The use of electric pumps for irrigation To make vegetables bigger or better
The use of chemical fertilisers To change vegetables so they can grow on poor
The use of insect killers soil
The use of special seedbeds Knowledge from abroad
IT technique and technical are words that mean something with
technology FORM machines, then technology must be the noun to match these two
words meaning new machines or doing things that are based on
modem knowledge.
agricultural FORM IT cultural is the adjective for culture, then agricultural must be
,
the adjective for agriculture, meaning to do with agriculture.
Step 3 Reading
Read the text carefully again, and give the students some explanations. Skimming the reading material as soon as possible and then finish the past reading, some more questions may be designed by teachers. Read the passage again and find out the main idea to each paragraph.
Step 4 Listening to the reading passage
Play the tape for the students to listen and follow. Pay attention to the pro- nunciation and intonation.
Step 5 Post-reading
Answers to Exercise 1:
1 D 2 A 3 C 4 C 5 C
Answers to Exercise 2: Sample:
Kind How would you change it? Why do you want to change it in this way?
Fruit Watermelon Grow them like blocks instead of balls Easier to store, takes less space
Vegetable Onion Make sure they don't hurt your eyes anymore EasIer to peel, and cut
Animal Sheep To have red wool Looks funny and then we don't need to dye wool to make clothes
（四）总结扩展
Step 6 Summary 小结
Step 7 Homework
Period 3第三节
（一）明确目标
1. Learn about the useful words and expression in the reading text.
2. Learn “Word formation”.
3. Grammar focus: the use of “it” for emphasis
4. Discuss the answers to all the exercises in the Students’Book.
（二）整体感知
Step 1 Presentation
In this class we’ll first go through the text and learn to use some language points. And then we’ll discuss the exercises together with each other.
（三）教学过程
Step 2 Language points in the reading text
1>It is on this arable land that the farmers produce food for the whole population of China.
It is...that... [用法]此为强调句型,该句型虽是本单元重点,但在高一上册unit 2; unit 6;
以及高一下册unit 16皆有出现, 本站也有详细解释.请另行查看.
2>Farmers have long used techniques to make their land produce more.
technique [用法]n. 技术；技巧
[举例]Dick Fosbury had a new technique for doing the high jump.
迪克福斯贝里有一种跳高的新技术。
the mastery of technique 掌握技术
3>Over time, many farming techniques have been modernized.
modernise [比较](1) vt. 使现代化 (2) vi. 现代化
[举例]modernize a hospital by installing the latest equipment 安装最新设备使医院现代化
[拓展]modernization n. 现代化
[举例]plans for modernization of existing factories 使现有工厂现代化的计划
4>To make as much use of the land as possible, two or more crops are planted each year where possible.
make use of [用法]利用，使用，采用
[举例]We make use of electricity every day. 我们每天使用电力。
She makes good use of her time. 她善于利用时间。
5>More advanced technical information was brought in from abroad in the 1980s.
bring in [用法]1) 从外提供；带入 (2) 引入；提出 (3) 生产出；生出…作为收益
[举例]The commune is expected to bring in more rice this year. 今年公社可望收获更多稻谷。
This will bring them in several thousand yuan. 这将使他们得到几千块钱的收益
[链接]本单元出现该短语的句子:
To the villagers great joy, the tree and tea crops are also bringing in money to them.
6>Import of technology and machines, and the international exchange of delegations have helped Chinese farmers improve their production.
Import [用法]v. 进口，输入 n. 进口；进口商品；含意
[举例]You must pay duty if you want to import wine. 如果你要进口酒，你就必须纳税。
None of the machines on display here are imported. 这里展出的所有机器没有一件是进口的。
delegation [用法]n. 代表团
[举例]Our delegation left Korea for home last Friday. 我国代表团于上星期五离开朝鲜回国。
a delegation from Japan 日本代表团
send a large delegation 派遣一个大的代表团。
7>Future agriculture should depend on high technology as well as traditional methods.
as well as [用法](1) 既…也（又）；不仅…而且 (2) 同样；同样好地
[举例]He has experience as well as knowledge. 他既有学识又有经验。
She s clever as well as beautiful. 她不但漂亮，而且聪明。
Scott has a flat in London as well as a house in Edinburgh.
斯科特不仅在爱丁堡有座房子，而且在伦敦有个套间。
I, as well as you, know that. 我和你一样，也知道那件事。
8>Not only is food production important but also taking care of the environment.
Not only...but also [用法]not only...but also...在连接句子时,not only后面的句子要使用倒装结构.
详见高一上册unit 2
9>The biggest problem of Chinese farmers is the shortage of arable land.
shortage [用法]n. 不足；缺少
[举例]After the hot summer, there was a shortage of water. 炎热的夏天过去后，出现缺水现象。
The school has a shortage of teachers; it needs three more.
那个学校的教师不够，还缺三位。
10>Many vegetables are grown in greenhouses where they are protected from the wind, rain and insects.
protect...from... [用法]见高一上册unit 3
11>In 1993,a kind of tomato was developed that was different from any grown before.
any grown before
[用法]此处的grown before为过去分词短语充当定语,和any之间有逻辑上的动宾关系.
12>G stands for genetically from the word genes.
stand for [用法]见高一上册unit 8
13>In other words, the way tomatoes grow from natural seed is changed.
In other words [用法]也就是说；换句话说
[举例]Joe doesn’t like work -- in other words, he s lazy! 乔不爱劳动--换句话说，他懒惰！
14>A variety of GM watermelons will be seedless.
variety [用法]见高一上册unit 10
Step 3 Practice: Vocabulary
Answers to Exercise 1:
Noun Verb Adjective
Fertiliser Fertilise Fertile
Production Produce Productive
Protection Protect Protected
Modification Modify Modified
1 modified 2 Protecting, protection 3 fertile, ferilisers 4 produce, productive
Step 4 Practice: Grammar
Answers to Exercise 1:
1 It is the children who often help their parents do the farm work.
2 It was in 1993 that a tomato was developed that was very different from any grown before.
3 It is the shortage of arable land that is the biggest problem for Chinese farmers.
4 It is the plants grown in the greenhouses that are protected from the wind, rain and insects.
5 It is high technology as well as traditional methods that future agriculture should depend on.
Answers to Exercise 2:
1 It was Henry who gave George a new tie for his birthday last year.
It was to George that Henry gave a new tie for his birthday last year.
It was a new tie that Henry gave George for his birthday last year.
It was last year that Henry gave George a new tie for his birthday.
2 It was during that period of time that they made three important discoveries.
It was three important discoveries that they made during that period of time.
It was they who made three important discoveries during that period of time.
3 It is in South America that some people still practise this kind of farming.
It is some people in South America who still practise this kind of farming.
It is this kind of farming that some people in South America still practise.
（四）总结扩展
Step 5 Summary
Have we ever tiled to make snacks or seen our mother make snacks. Let’s try to write the recipe for your favorite dish. Before writing, you should read Tips first.
Step 6 Homework
Period 4 第四节
（一） 明确目标
1. Review the language points learnt last period.
2. Get the students to realize the great contribution Chinese
3. Do some writing to develop the students writing skill.
(二) 整体感知
Step 1 Presentation
TaskⅠ have you heard the name Jia SiXie before?
What was he famous for? What was the great (work) book he wrote? Do you know what it was about?
TaskⅠ encourage the students to find out any popular problems about the weather or farming they have know。
（三）教学过程
Step 1 Question the students on some language points
Step 2 Integrating skills
We have learnt how to give advice. Now let’s try to write letters giving advice. Here in our textbook there are letters asking for some advice. Read them quickly, then write down four pieces of advice for each of them using “had better (not) , ”ought (not) to or should (not) .
Many students like having snacks. Is the habit good or bad? Let s read “Snacks“.
Step 3 Listening to the Passage
Step 4 Reading comprehension
After fast reading, do the following True-or-False exercises.
Answers to Exercise 1:
Some of the advice that Jia Sixie gave to farmers in his book Qimin Yaoshu was as follows:
1 Fanners should do things at the right time of the year. 2 Fanners should examine the soil carefully. .
3 If the condition of the soil is not good, farmers should improve it.
4 Before sowing or planting crops, farmers should clean rough ground and remove weeds.
5 Farmers should let sheep or cattle (cows) walk on the land before sowing or planting crops.
6 Farmers should plough the land, so weeds ate destroyed.
7 When ploughing the land, farmers should plough deep the first time and less deep the second time.
8 Farmers will get the best results if they change crops in their fields.
9 If farmers plant rice in a field one year, and wheat in that field the following year, they will harvest good
crops.
10 If farmers plant wheat close together, they will have better results than when 'they plant wheat leaving space between the plants.
11 It is good to grow different plants next to each other in the same field.
Suggested plan:
Students may need to visit the library or go on the Internet to find out more information about how to make a vegetable garden. They can enter the keyword search ”planning a vegetable garden“ or ”growing a vegetable garden“ or ”tips for a successful garden.“
Month What will be done
November It's in November when we have to plough the land for the fIrst time. The ploughing has to be
done deep. Spread manure and old leaves on the land and plough them under.
December It's in December when we should make a plan for our vegetable garden for next year. Check
the seeds left over from last year. Repair tools and make a list of new tools to buy.
It's in January when we should buy enough seed to plant for two or three crops. Check the
January condition of the soil. If the soil is not good, you should improve it. Put manure and dead leaves
on the land if you did not do this in November. You can also use fertilisers to the soil. Get the
seedbeds or seed boxes ready for growing plants such as tomato, pepper and eggplant.
It's in February when you should plant the seedbeds. Prepare the land for planting. Let sheep
February or cows walk on the land. Their manure will improve the soil and they will destroy weeds or
eat them. Also prepare seeds for planting in April.
It's in March when you should give some attention to the early-planted crops. Add a little
March fertiliser to young crops. Thin the young plants to give them mqre room to grow. Plough the
land a second time to prepare it for the warm-season vegetables.
April It's in April when you should plant beans, corn, eggplant, peas, peppers, tomatoes and
watermelons. Remove weeds and grass.
May It's in May when you have to watch out for insects. Fight insects and disease when you see them.
Water the plants when needed. Build a frame of wood or bamboo for beans to climb on.
It's in June that you have to harvest vegetables such as beans and peas, onions and potatoes.
June Store onions and potatoes dry and cool. Prepare the land for planting new crops. Take care of
Irrigation.
It's in July when you should make a plan for the crops you want to plant in autumn. Fight
July drought with enough irrigation of the land. Remove weeds. Plant second crops for tomatoes,
corn and beans. In July it's also the time to plant big pumpkins for Halloween!
August It's in August when we have to plant broccoli, cabbage, carrots and onions. Make sure to water
.
the plants enough. Harvest ripe fruit and vegetables.
September It's in September when we harvest green peppers and tomatoes before the cold of winter comes.
Water and weed the crops that were planted in August.
It's in October when the last crops are harvested. Put dead plants, old leaves and other materials
October together. Store animal manure for use as fertiliser next year. Start thinking about your garden
plans for next year.
Give the students some explanations when necessary.
Step 5 Writing
Now let s have some listening training. After the team work, read the passage carefully to search more details about the topic.
Step 3 writing skill
TaskⅠwrite a brief introduction to Yia SiXie and his work.
TaskⅡ imagine you own a vegetable garden on something like that try to write a plan for it.
Step 4 check the writing
Sample essay:
It is less than a hundred years ago that the vast majority of farmers was unable to read and write. They learnt the work on the farm from their parents. Sometimes, they were told about ways in which they could improve their farming. But if they lived in far off places or in the mountains, there were few opportunities to learn about better ways of farming.
During the second half of the twentieth century, this situation was improved. Farmers were taught how to read and write. Books and magazines were published for farmers so that they could read about new methods of farming and improve their own situation. It also became possible for some farmers to experiment and share their results and discoveries in written reports with others. Still, not all farmers can read and write, but their number is getting smaller.
To modernise and use new techniques, farmers have to be able to read and write. They must be able to read what is written on bags of fertilisers they buy, to know how to use them and how to use them safely. They also have to be able to read the instructions on how to use new tools and machines. In the future, farmers will have to learn more to be able to use modem techniques such as greenhouses and GM.
Many farmers take courses where they learn about new technologies in agriculture. They learn to accept and how to use the new technologies. The government and local agricultural organisations have developed a special programme for farmers, called the ”Green Certificate“ project. Already more than ten million farmers have completed this course and many farmers are becoming grain-growing expert
（四）总结扩展
Step 6 Necessary language points
Today we ve done some listening and speaking, and learn how to give advice and some everyday English used between doctors and patients.
1>Much of the wisdom discovered by early Chinese scientists is still useful for farmers today.
wisdom [用法] n.[U] 聪明，才智
[举例]I am struck by Annie s wisdom. 安妮的智慧使我惊叹不已。
He is a man of wisdom. 他是个聪明人。
Let us consider the wisdom of following his advice. 让我们考虑按他的意见做是否明智。
2>Jia Sixie s book is a practical guide to farming.
practical [用法]a.实践的；实用的
[举例]Earning a living is a practical matter. 谋生是一实际问题。
He is a practical man and doesn’t like empty talk. 他是一个注重实干的人，不喜欢空谈。
Rowing across the Atlantic is not a practical idea. 划船横渡大西洋不是个明智的想法。
guide [用法]vt. 1.指导 2.导游 n.1.指南，指导 2.手册 3.向导
[举例]He guided us through the forest. 他领我们穿过了森林。
He flashed a torch to guide me. 他打手电给我引路。
3>But if you go against nature and do things at the wrong time of year, you will have to do more work and the results will not be so good.
go against [用法]见高一下册unit 16
4>If the condition of the soil is not so good, you should improve it.
condition [用法]n.1.状况 2.[复]环境 3.（先决）条件
[举例]the condition of affairs (世界的) 局势 [事态] ,社会动向
my financial condition 我的经济状况 [收支情形]
the condition of weightlessness 无重力状态
not...on any condition=on no condition 无论在什么条件 [任何状况] 下都不…,绝不…
What are your conditions for accepting the offer? 在什么条件下你才会接受这个提议？
I will let you go only on one condition. 只有在一种条件下我才会让你走。
make it a condition that... 以…为条件
5>Before sowing or planting crops, rough ground must be cleaned and weeds removed.
remove [用法]vt.脱掉;去掉,消除(+from)
[举例]She saw he had removed his glasses. 她看到他摘下了他的眼镜。
[举例]Students removed several desks to another classroom.
学生们把几张书桌搬到另外一间教室。
She removed the painting to another wall. 她把画搬到另一面墙上。
He was removed from the post. 他被解雇了。
6>The best harvest is reached when farmers change the crops in the fields.
reach [用法]vt. 获得；占有；收到
[举例]Your letter reached me the day before yesterday. 你的信我前天收到。
Part of the reply reached my ears. 有几句答话传到我的耳朵里了。
The news only reached me a moment ago. 我刚刚得到这个消息。
The two parties reached on an agreement. 双方达成了协议。
7>For example, do not plant rice year after year in the same field.
year after year [用法]一年又一年;年复一年
[比较]The university gets bigger, year by year. 这所大学每年都在扩大。
Tens of thousands of men, year after year, have travelled southwards to find work.
每年都有好几万人去南方找工作。
8>Other scientists said that wheat should be planted with space between the plants.
with space between the plants [用法]with的复合结构.详见高一上册unit 2; unit 11
9>He also said that it is good to grow different plants next to each other in the same field.
next to [用法](1) 在…的旁边；贴近；紧挨着
(2) 仅次于那个，这个，它，我，等 (3) 几乎
[举例]Our house is next to the Post Office. 我们的家在邮局旁边。
You can sit next to Roger at dinner. 吃饭时你靠着罗杰坐。
In one room next to him I found a lot of good books.
在他隔壁的一个房间里我发现很多好书。
the shop next to the corner 路口第二家商店
the largest city next to London 仅次于伦敦的最大的城市
It is next to impossible. 这简直是不可能的。
10>The wisdom of farmers about the weather and farming is collected and passed on from generation to generation.
pass on [用法]1) 转告；带信儿 (2) 把…传递给另一人
[举例]Please pass on the message to your classmates. 请把消息告诉你的同学。
Please pass on my regards to your parents. 请代我向你的父母问好。
Step 7 Homework
Period 5 第五节
（一）明确目标
1. Do some listening to improve the students listening ability.
2. Making simple dialogues to train the students speaking ability.
（二）整体感知
Step 1 Presentation
Today we come to the Workbook and do the listening comprehension and also do some talking practice.
（三）教学过程
Step 2 Listening comprehension
LISTENNIN G TEXT:
Helen talks about her job.
Hello, my name's Helen and I live on the west coast of Canada. I work on a fish farm.
Right now I'm feeding the fish, which are kept in cages in the sea. The cages are tied to the rocks on the j bottom of the sea. It can get very windy here. Twice a ! day I put the fish food in the boat and go out to the cages. The fish are always hungry!
When the fish have grown to the right size, we pull the cages out of the water. The fish are killed and cleaned. Our fish farm is a long way from the nearest market. So we either freeze the fish or smoke them. We don't salt any fish here. Some fish farms do, but we don't.
Three of us work here and there's always a lot to do. Inside that building over there we have tanks for the young fish. We produce all our own fish from eggs. The fish start to grow in fresh water. Then, when they are bigger they go into the sea, which is salty, of course.
There's always a lot of work to do: feeding the fish, cleaning the tanks, getting eggs out of the best of the large fish, harvesting the fish, cleaning them and smoking them. We burn our own wood and that way we get a very good strong smoke. It's more work, but we get higher prices for our smoked fish.
Answers to Exercise 1:
1 She is (probably) a fisherwoman.
2 I think she is going to open the boxes and feed the fish. Or: I think she is on her way to the market to sell the fish.
3 Without listening to the tape, you may have various answers. Sample answer:
If you are a fisherman / woman you have to get up early every morning. The first thing to do is to go out in the boat and see if anything is caught in the nets. Next, you have to bring in the fish and throw out the nets for the next catch. Then, the fish must be brought to land. The fish should be kept in big boxes full of water, so they don't die.
Answers to Exercise 2:
1 We feed the fish twice a day.
2 We produce our own fish from eggs in the tanks.
Or: We clean the tanks.
3 We get the eggs out of the best of the large fish.
4 When the fish are big enough, we put them in cages in the sea.
S When the fish have grown to the right size, we harvest them, clean them, freeze them or smoke them.
6 We take them by truck to the nearest market.
Answers to Exercise 3:
1 The cages have to be tied to the bottom of the sea because it is windy.
2 They freeze or smoke all the fish because the fishfarm is a long way from the nearest market.
3 They bum their own wood because in that way they get a good strong smoke.
4 They smoke their fish themselves, because they get higher prices for smoked fish.
Step 3 Talking practice
Sample dialogues:
Dialogue 1:
SI = Student 1: Pro because he/she thinks this is the best way to do it.
S2 = Student 2: Con because he/she is a vegetarian S3 = Student 3: Pro because he/she is a farmer who thinks this is the best way.
S4 = Student 4: Con because he/she thinks the animals should not suffer.
SI: Well, I don't know so much about factory farms, but the fact is that more and more people want to eat meat, so we have to raise more and more farm animals for food. We must have factory farms to raise these animals.
S2: People should eat less meat or should even try to eat as little meat as they can. Meat is not very healthy for people anyway. That's why so many people get too fat in China.
S3: I like eating meat; but I don't like the idea that the animals have a terrible life before they are killed for food.
S4: It is not so easy. Raising farm animals takes up a lot of space. It is cheaper to have the animals close together, on what you call a factory farm. I need less land and fewer people to take care of the animals. Can you imagine how much time it would take us to look for eggs if I had 1O, OOO chickens running loose in my yard?
S3: China is a very big country. We have enough space and it would be better if more people found jobs feeding, taking care of the animals and collecting the eggs.
S4: That's just what you think. But you don't know much about farming, or you don't understand.
S4: I'm sorry. What I wanted to say is that it is true that China is a big country, but we can't build these buildings just about everywhere and besides, they should not be too far away from the farm. As a farmer I must be able to manage everything myself.
SI: I agree. Farming is important to our economy, and China should not be dependent on foreign countries for food. What S2 says is not true. Of course we could eat other products instead of meat to get the protein we need. But then, farmers would have to grow more soy beans to produce tofu. Our country is big, but only 7% of the land can be used for growing crops. So it is better to use land that is not arable to build factory farms that produce animal meat. That is our best source for protein.
S3: But still we must find a solution for the factory farms. Too many animals suffer. When the animals suffer, the meat will not be as tasty as that from farm animals. Everyone knows that farm chickens are tastier than factory chickens.
S2: Besides, the bio industry produces too much manure that is harmful to the environment.
Dialogue 2:
SI = Student 1: Will take over farm business but doesn't believe in progress.
S2 = Student 2: Wants to take over farm business and believes in progress.
S3 = Student 3: Believes in progress, but doesn't want to take over the farm.
S4 = Student 4: Won't take over the farm business and doesn't believe in progress.
S4: No. I don't want to take over the farm of my parents. I have seen enough of it. It is hard work and you can't earn much money. Even if modem ways of farming made farming easier or better, success always depends on the weather. And a lot of hard work can be lost because of a dry summer, a storm or some other disaster. I want to study more so I can look for another job.
S1: What S4 says about the weather is true. But there aren't many other jobs in our village. I don't want to move to a big city. I want to stay in our province, where all my friends and family are. I will take over the farm from my parents. It is hard work, but I know how to do it. Maybe learning something can help a little, but not much.
S2: Well, I want to take over the farm from my parents. But before that, I want to study more agricultural science. My father took a short course about new ways of fertilising and crop rotation a few years ago, and he learnt a lot from that. He also always reads the local magazine about new seeds and new kinds of fruit trees and so on. My uncle wrote a book about growing grapes and my cousins are now making wine. They were the first in our village to do that, and now some other farmers want to try that as well.
S3: I agree with that, but for myself I think farming is a job that is too hard. I think a lot of improvement can be made, but still the work will be dirty and heavy, and you have to get up too early every day.
S2: I don't think the work is dirty. Most materials are natural and you can take a shower when you are finished. It is much healthier than working in a factory where you get dirty with oil and breathe in dangerous smoke and gases.
S1: Yes, but the work is heavy and there is always so much to be done. It's terrible. Sometimes you must work in the burning sun and sometimes in the rain, or worse.
S2: But all that will improve. Growing crops in greenhouses is not only better for the plants, but also for the farmers. And much of the work can be done using machines.
Dialogue 3:
SI = Student 1: Is optimistic and thinks there are many opportunities.
S2 = Student 2: Is pessimistic and thinks there are too many farmers in China.
S3 = Student 3: Believes that farmers in China have no other choice. They must develop new products.
S4 = Student 4: Traditional. Thinks new product don't fit in with Chinese culture.
S1: Welcome everybody to the discussion. Over the past 15 years many farmers have started new businesses growing different crops or doing other things on their farms. Many of them have been very successful.
I think it is great. Farmers have had traditional ideas about farming for too long. There was a time when everybody had the same type of life, and there were only few things to be bought in the shops. But as people have more money to spend, they like buying different products. So now, farmers can grow whatever they like.
S2: Well, that's not true. They can't just grow whatever they like. Farmers can only grow products that people will buy. You can't start growing something that nobody wants.
S4: True. Besides, in many places the land can only be used for some crops. And of course the climate does not always allow growing what you want.
S3: But farmers will have to. If everybody is growing the same few crops, the price will go down and farmers have no opportunity to make more money. Farmers must take a risk. You can't do any business without risk. Farmers will have to read newspapers and magazines to find out what people will want to buy. They should know enough about the land and agriculture to know whether they can grow new crops with success. Then, when they are the first to do something new, they must grab the opportunity.
S2: Haha. That is only for the farmer who starts doing something. As soon as his neighbours see that he is successful, many others will follow. And very soon everybody in the region will be growing that crop. And what happens then? The prices will drop.
SI: Well, farmers must know when to take risks. Many people think that there are no chances in farming, but there are. In fact, there are many. The important thing is to make use of the opportunities.
S3: Yes. Chinese farmers have many opportunities to grow new crops and produce new products, not only for changing markets in China, but also for the export market.
SI: Yes. And that creates even more opportunities.
Step 4 Sample talking
Step 5 Summary 小结
Step 7 Homework
Period 6 第六节
（一）明确目标
1. Discuss all the answers to the exercises in the Workbook.
2. Learn to use the grammar knowledge
3. Further develop the students’ writing skills.
（二）整体感知
Step 1 Presentation
In the class
（三）教学过程
Step 2 Vocabulary
Answers to Exercise 1:
1 against 2 of 3 In 4 Over 5 on 6 of 7 from 8 as 9 from 10 with 110f 12 into
Answers to Exercise 2:
1 Future agriculture should depend on high technology as well as traditional methods.
2 Not only food production, but taking care of the environment is also important.
3 The farmers are working hard to improve the quality as well as the quantity of the crops.
4 The book does not only talk about farming but also about gardening.
Answers to Exercise 3:
1 ploughed 2 fertilisers 3 sown / sowed 4 weed / remove weeds 5 irrigation
6 kill insects 7 harvest
Step 3 Grammar
Answers to Exercise 1:
1 No, it is the shortage of arable land that is the biggest problem of Chinese farmers.
2 No, it is in greenhouses that many vegetables are grown today.
3 No, it is with GM technique that these tomatoes are grown.
4 No, it is the ones that have the best colour that are the best seed-heads.
5 No, it was from farmers that Jia Sixie learnt.
Answers to Exercise 2:
1 It was to find happiness that a pretty princess from Heaven secretly came to earth. .
2 It was' her excellent waving skills that the villagers admired.
3 It was for a few years that the family lived peace- fully and happily.
4 It was her grandmother who ordered her to leave at once.
5 It is ,each year on the seventh day of the seventh month that all the magpies in the world form a bridge so that Niu Lang and Zhi Nu may enjoy a short get-together.
Answers to Exercise 3:
1 A 2 D 3C 4D 5 C 6A 7 B 8 C 9 C 10 B
Step 4 Integrating skills
We have learnt how to give advice. Now let’s try to write letters giving advice. Here in our textbook there are letters asking for some advice. Read them quickly, then write down four pieces of advice for each of them using ”had better (not) , “ought (not) to or should (not) .
Many students like having snacks. Is the habit good or bad? Let s read “Snacks”.
Step 5 Listening to the Passage
Step 6 Reading comprehension
After fast reading, do the following True-or-False exercises.
Answers to Exercise 1:
The correct order of the pictures is: 3,4, 1,2 (or 4, 1,2,3).
Sample sentences:
1 The hills surrounding the villages are green and covered with trees and grasslands. Farmers use the land, but also take care of the environment.
2 The trees are cut down in large numbers. The whole forest has disappeared, and no new trees are lanted.
3 When it rains, the soil is washed away. The barren hills cannot be used for agriculture.
4 Local people start to repair the damage that was done to the environment. By planting trees, the barren hills will be turned green again.
Answers to Exercise 2:
Five rules of what people should do in the woods.
1 WALK on the paths or roads.
2 PLANT new trees when cutting down any.
3 PROTECT young trees from being eaten by deer or rabbits.
4 WATER young trees and give left-over fertiliser to trees near the village.
5 RESPECT nature and care for the trees.
Five rules of what people should not do in the woods.
1 DON'T make any fires in the wood.
2 DON'T throw away any cigarettes.
3 DON'T damage or cut down young trees.
4 DON'T throw away any rubbish.
5 DON'T kill birds or other animals in the wood.
Step 7 Sample writng
Sample writing:
Jackapple from Southern China
The Jackapple (木波罗 ) also known as Jackfruit, grows in southern China. It is the largest fruit in the world that grows on trees. It looks a bit like a melon, and is very heavy. The biggest ones can reach a length of 3 feet, and weigh up to 100 pounds, though most are smaller. The skin is thick and hard. The uncut ripe fruit has a strong smell. On the inside, the ripe fruit looks like a collection of yellow fruit parts, each with a large light brown seed of up to 2.5 cm long. There may be as many as 100 to 500 seeds per fruit.
The green unripe fruit flesh can be cooked as a vegetable and used in dishes and salads. The ripe fruit is cream-coloured or yellow and quite soft. It can be eaten raw as fruit, boiled or fried. The flavour is strong and sweet like that of pineapple or banana, sweet but less juicy. The large seeds can be roasted and have a flavour similar to chestnuts or large white beans.
Jackapple fruit makes an excellent dessert. It is healthy and full of Vitamin C. The seeds can be eaten after cooking. They can be boiled in salted water, or roasted like chestnuts. Jackapple juice tastes wonderful.
（四）总结扩展
Step 5 Summary
Have we ever tiled to make snacks or seen our mother make snacks. Let’s try to write the recipe for your favorite dish. Before writing, you should read Tips first.
4. Workbook
1>Soon the princess fell in love with Niu Lang.
fall in love with [用法]爱上（某人）
2>The time has come to repair the damage that was done to the environment.
to repair the damage that was done to the environment
[用法]此处的不定式短语应理解为The time的定语.
3>Cutting down trees and selling the wood was the only way for poor families to make some money and feed their families.
feed [用法]供养
[拓展]feed的其他用法: vt. 1.喂养，饲养 2.向…供给 n. 饲料
vi. (牛、马等）吃东西；以…为食物
4>As a result, all the hills surrounding their village are now covered with green trees.
surrounding... [用法]1.现在分词短语做定语,和all the hills有逻辑上的主谓关系.
2.surround:v. 围；围绕；包围
[举例]Trees surrounded the lake. 湖的周围长满了树。
The pupils surrounded the teacher. 学生们围着老师。
5>New Zealand kiwi fruit growers decided to introduce the new fruit to the rest of the world and it was a great success.
success [用法][C] 成功的事 ; 取得成就的人 [U] 成功
[举例]I wish Jill success with her studies. 我祝愿吉尔在学习上取得成功。
He has had great success in life. 他的事业很成功。
I tried to find him in the crowd, but had no success. 我试图在人群中找到他，但是没有找到。
Mary is a great success as a singer. 玛丽唱歌，红极一时。
He was not a success as a governor. 作
Step 7 Homework
Period 7 第七节
1． 检查本单元单词、短语及相关句型。
2． 讲评统一布置的课外基础练习。
篇18：人教版高一下英语教案高一第十八单元(人教版高一英语下册教案教学设计)
New Zealand
I. Teaching aims and demands 教学目标和要求:
1.Topics 话题
1.Talk about New Zealand
2.Function: 交际功能
描述方位和方向(Describing location and direction)
It s in the east of...
It is to the north of...
It is in the northern part of...
northeastern/northwestern Sichuan...
3.Vocabulary 重点词汇和短语
fisherman; great-grandfather; northeastern; central; coast; surround; mild; bay; harbour; volcano; spring; heat; surface; rat; settle; settler; mainly; voyage; possession; bold; paragraph; grassland; mountainous; surprising; secretary; percent; wedding; conference; relation; agricultural; cattle; export; lamb; ship; sail; cottage; seaside; camp
take possession of; make up; turn to; go sailing; go camping
4.Grammar:语法
1>能够用英语表达做某事的重要性、难易程度、可能性或个人感受---形式主语It
It is interesting to visit New Zealand.
It is a good thing the New Zealand helps the Maori to keep their own language and culture.
2>能够用英语谈论时间、距离和天气---无人称代词It
It is winter here but summer in New Zealand.
It was getting dark.
It is 3,500 kilometres from Polynesia to New Zealand.
It is April 1st today.
II. Difficult points
III. Main teaching aids教具：A tape-recorder; Multimedia, projector, role cards
Ⅳ. Main teaching methods 教法：
1. The interaction between the teacher and the students, and among the students themselves; Attention to the students’ listening, speaking, reading and writing; and so on.
2. Listening-and–answering activity to help the students go through with the listening material.
3. Use both individual work and group or pair work to make every student work and think in class
V. Teaching procedure：
Period 1第一节
（一）明确目标
1. Warming up to arouse the students love in talking.
2. Do some listening to improve the students listening ability.
3. Making simple dialogues to train the students speaking ability.
4. Learn the useful expressions to talk about location and direction.
(二) 整体感知
Step 1 Presentation
Show the students a map of china and ask them to find out several places and tell the others the location of these places.
（三）教学过程
Step 2 Warming up
Ask the Ss to list the names of countries neighboring China in four directions according to the map of Asia printed in the book. Then let the Ss say the positions of the different places and waters in relation to China like the examples on page 36.
North: Mongolia, Russia, Kazakhstan
South: India, Vietnam, Myanmar, Laos, Nepal,
East: North Korea, South Korea, The Philippines
West: Afghanistan, Pakistan, Kyrgyzstan, Tajikistan Other: Thailand, Malaysia, Singapore, Indonesia, Japan
Seas: Bohai Sea, Yellow Sea, East China Sea, South China Sea. The Pacific Ocean is off the eastern shore of Taiwan Island
Islands: Taiwan Island, Hainan Island, Nansha Islands
Sample answers:
Mongolia lies to the north of Inner Mongolia.
Russia lies to the north of China.
India lies to the south of Tibet.
Vietnam lies to the south of China.
Myanmar lies to the west of China.
North Korea lies to the east of China.
South Korea lies to the east of China across the Yellow Sea.
The Philippines lie flies to the southeast of Guangdong Province in China.
Afghanistan lies to the west of China.
Pakistan lies to the west of China.
Thailand lies to the south of Yunnan Province in China. Malaysia, Singapore and Indonesia lie to the south of China.
Japan lies to the east of China.
The Bohai Sea lies to the north of Shandong Province. The Yellow Sea lies to the east of Shandong and Jiangsu Province.
The East China Sea lies to the east of Zhejiang Province.
The South China Sea lies to the south of Hainan, Guangxi and Guangdong Provinces.
The Pacific Ocean lies to the east of Taiwan.
The Pacific Ocean is off the eastern coast of Taiwan Island.
Taiwan (Island) lies to the east of Fujian Province.
Taiwan (Island) lies off the coast of Fujian Province / the mainland of China.
Hainan (Island) lies to the south of Guangdong ProvInce.
Hainan (Island) lies off the coast of Guangdong Province ! South China.
Step 3 Listening comprehension
Now let s have some listening training. Ask the students to look at the map on page 37.this is the map of Dolphin island. Play the tape for the first time for the students to finish exercise 1. Play the tape again. This time the students are required to do Exercise 2.
LISTENING TEXT
Dolphin Island is a small country that lies about 1,500 kilometres off the coast of Japan, in the middle of the Pacific Ocean. From the beaches in the north, to the rocks on the coast in the south, the island is less than a hundred kilometres long, and from the west coast to the east coast the island is nowhere more than 80 kilometres wide. Seven small islands, some of them only large rocks, lying off the eastern coast, also belong to Dolphin Island. Winfield, the capital city, lies on the southwestern coast.
The highest mountain on Dolphin Island, Mount Ashton in the west, is a dead volcano. It is part of a range of mountains, running from north to south along the western coast. The beaches in the north and on the eastern coast are covered with fine white sand. Dolphin Island has a mild sea climate. Most of the land can be used as farmland. The south of the island is covered with forests.
Dolphin Island has only four cities: The town of Ashton Creek lies in the north, Winfield in the southwest, Turnpike in the centre and Epsom on the eastern coast, about forty kilometres from Ashton. A railway line connects these cities. There is a small river that runs from the foot of Mount Ashton, through the northern town into the ocean. Dolphin Island is popular with tourists both from East Asia and the United States. Most of them stay in the seaside town of Ashton Creek, where many hotels have been built over the past five years. Most of the people on the island make a living from farming. In the summer months, some people get a nice, extra income out of tourism, while in winter fishing is also important.
Answers to Part 1:
Answers to Part 2:
1 D 2 C 3 A 4 C
Step 4 Speaking practice
The teacher asks one of the students “where are you from?” “Can you tell me the position of your hometown?” encourage the students to use “in the north/south/east/west of” or “to the north/south/east/west of “
Read the example dialogue. Then get the students to talk about the birthplaces of their grandparents. Parents and them selves in pairs. At the edn ask one or two pairs to act out their dialogues in front of the class.
（四）总结扩展
Step 5 Necessary language points
Today we ve done some listening and speaking, and learn how to give advice and some everyday English used between doctors and patients.
Listening and speaking听说要点
1>What are the positions of the waters in relation to China?
waters [用法](国家的)海域,领海;大片水域
[举例]The ship was in European waters. 船在欧洲水域航行。
in relation to [用法]关于；和...有关
[举例]I have a lot to say in relation to that affair. 关于那件事我有好多话要说。
In relation to London, our town is very small. 和伦敦相比，我们这个城市小得很。
2>Weihai lies about 90 kilometres east of Yantai.
east [用法]n. 东,东方[the east] a. 东的,东方的,东部的 ad. 向东方;在东方;来自东方
[举例]China faces the Pacific on the east. 中国东临太平洋。
Japan is in the east of Asia.
3>What about your great-grandfather on your father s side?
on one s side [用法]这里指‘家系,血统’
[举例]The grandfather on his mother s side is still living. 他外祖父还健在。
Step 6 Summary小结:
Step 7 Homework
Period 2第二节
（一）明确目标
1. Develop the students reading ability, especially their reading comprehension.
2. Read the reading passage and know about New Zealand.
（二）整体感知
Step 1 Presentation
Today we come to the Reading. It’s about New Zealand. Today we are going to read about New Zealand, as we know, New Zealand is an island. Do you know where it is? Now, well look at the map and New Zealand and the seas surrounding it, (the Pacific and Tasman Sea)
（三）教学过程
Step 2 Pre-reading discussions
Get the students to look at the map of the world and write down the names of five islands and describe where they are. Then ask the students to compare the notes with the partners. At the end collect the answers from some of the students.
Answers to Exercise 1:
Name of the island Location
Taiwan Taiwan Island lies off the east of the mainland of China.
Hainan Hainan Island lies off the southern coast of the mainland of China, in the“ South China Sea.
The Philippines The Philippines lie(s) in the South China Sea, southeast of Hong Kong.
Hawaii ”Hawaii lies in the middle of the Pacific Ocean.
New Zealand New Zealand lies off the east coast of the mainland of Australia.
Great Britain Great Britain lies off the northwest coast of Europe. The nearest countries are France and Ireland, which is also an island.
Answers to Exercise 2:
The capital of Taiwan is Tapei, which lies in the north of the island.
The capital of Hainan is Haikou City, located in northern part of the island.
The capital of the Philippines is Manila, which lies in the south on the second largest, northern island. Honolulu, in the northwest, is the capital of Hawaii. Wellington, on the southwest coast of the North Island, is the capital of New Zealand.
London, the capital city of Great Britain, lies in the southeast.
Answers to Exercise 3:
For all destinations, students may answer that they can be reached by air from the nearest city with an airport. However, the exercise will be more interesting if students describe in detail how they would travel, which cities they would pass through and the exact locations of these cities. Instead of air travel, encourage students to describe journeys over land and sea voyages.
Step 3 Reading
Read the text carefully again, and give the students some explanations. Ask the students to read the text silently and fast to get general idea of each paragraph
Paragraph 1 geography
Paragraph 2; climate
Paragraph 3: natural resource
Paragraph 4 history
Paragraph About Title
Paragraph 1 Location Geography
Paragraph 2 Climate Climate
Paragraph 3 Landscape Nature
Paragraph 4 History History
Step 4 Listening to the reading passage
Play the tape for the students to listen and follow. Pay attention to the pronunciation and intonation.
Step 5 Post-reading
Answers to the exercises:
1 I It refers to New Zealand.
2 which refers to hot springs.
3 this heat refers-to the heat near the earth's surface.
4 these settlers refers to European I British settlers.
5 it refers to England.
2 I History I Fourth paragraph
2 Climate I Second paragraph
3 Natural beauty I Third paragraph
4 Geography I First paragraph
3 A New Zealand lies in the Pacific Ocean.
B The Tasman Sea lies to the west of New Zealand.
C Wellington, the capital of New Zealand, lies in the southeast of the North Island.
D Auckland lies on the northeastern coast of New Zealand.
E Christchurch lies to the east, on the South Island of New Zealand.
4 I B 2 B 3 D 4 D
5 New Zealand has mild summers with lighter rain and cold winters with heavier rain. Nights in both seasons are cooler than days but not so much cooler. The graphs don't give any information about the climate and weather in autumn and spring. The graphs also don't give any information about the number of hours that the sun shines.
6 The climate on the North Island in New Zealand is like the warm climate in Southern China although the rainfall is less. The climate of the South Island can still be called mild, and is like the climate in southwestern China although it does not get as much rainfall. Perhaps on the whole, China is a bit warmer in summer and a bit colder in winter.
（四）总结扩展
Step 6 Summary 小结
Step 7 Homework
Period 3第三节
（一）明确目标
1. Learn about the useful words and expression in the reading text.
2. To master some basic vocabulary and use the proper words to describe the land.
3. To learn the grammar: the use of “it” as subject
4. Discuss the answers to all the exercises in the Students’Book.
（二）整体感知
Step 1 Presentation
In this class we’ll first go through the text and learn to use some language points. And then we’ll discuss the exercises together with each other.
1. Revise the text “New Zealand” asks the students to describe the location of the island and the natural beauty.
2. When we describe the land, we usually use some use some nouns and some adjectives
（三）教学过程
Step 2 Language points in the reading text
1>New Zealand ia an island that lies off the eastern coast of Australia.
off [用法]prep. 离开...,隔着...;在(离岸边不远的)海面
2>It is made up of two large islands.
be made up of [用法]由什么组成
[例句]They make up about six percent of the total population.（该句来自本单元）
3>The oceans and seas surrounding the islands are deep blue and many of its cities lie on the bay.
surrounding the islands [用法]现在分词短语做定语。surround vt. 包围,围绕;圈住
[举例]Trees surround our house. 我们房子的四周都是树。
The police surrounded the house. 警察包围了这幢房子。
deep [用法](颜色)深的,浓的
[举例]I like that suit of deep colour. 我喜欢那套深颜色的衣服。
on the bay [用法]此处的on为 prep. 在…之旁；接近
[例句]Paris is on the Seine. 巴黎位于塞因河边。
He lives in a house on the main road. 他住在大路边的一栋房子里。
4>The sand beaches in New Zealand are also very clean.
beach [用法]n. 海滩
[例句]In summer people often go to the beach and swim. 夏天人们常到海滩游泳。
The children are playing on the beach. 孩子们在海滩上玩。
5>They settled mainly on the North Island where the weather was warmer.
settle [用法]vt/vi 1. 安放;安顿;安排; 2.使(心情)平静下来
[举例]He settled his child in a corner of the compartment. 他把孩子安顿在车厢的一个角落里。
After the excitement I tried to settle myself. 激动过后,我设法平静下来。
The family has settled in Canada. 这家人已定居加拿大。
6>Caption Cook took possession of the island in 1769.
take possession of [用法]占领;占有
[联想]1/possession
[用法]n.1. 拥有;占有[U] 2. 所有物;财产[P] 3. 领地,属地,殖民地[C]
[举例]The possession of a degree does not guarantee you a job.
拥有一个学位不能保证你找到工作。
Her possessions could fit in one suitcase. 她的全部财物可以装在一个手提箱内。
Some Caribbean islands are still French possessions.
一些加勒比岛屿至今仍是法国的领地。
7>The Maori signed an agreement with the settlers.
sign an agreement [用法]签署协议
[联想]sign his name 签名 reach an agreement 达成协议
8>What do the words in bold refer to?
refer to [用法]提到;指;参照
[举例]Don t refer to this matter again, please. 请别再提这件事。
refer to a dictionary 查字典
Step 3 Practice: Vocabulary
Let the students look at the word webs. Make sure the students know the meaning of these words. Then let them talk in pairs about the different kinds of land. Allow them enough time to write down the sentences in their notebooks.
A sample version:
Some parts of southwestern China has a very beautiful landscape with green hills and mountains, some parts of northeast are covered with thick forests. In the west there is a large area of deserts. But in cities, there is not enough grassland because of a large population.
Sample sentences
Nouns:
1 The jungles of South East Asia are the natural habitat to many different kinds of subtropical animals and plants.
2 Canada is covered by very large forests.
3 The Chinese province of Inner Mongolia is famous for its grasslands.
4 Some of the mountains in Southwest China belong to the highest in the world.
S The Summer Palace is built on the hills to the west of Beijing.
6 Sand from the deserts in Northwest China is carried over hundreds of kilometres and causes terrible sand storms in spring.
Adjectives:
1 By the end of spring, our schoolyard has turned into a grassy field.
2 The best swimming and sunbathing is along the sandy beaches on Hainan Island.
3 The river flows through flat land between the mountains.
4 Most of the countryside in Southeast England is hilly.
5 There is only a rocky path that leads to the top of the mountain.
6 In the past the hillsides and most of the land was wooded.
7 Coming. from a mountainous country; the girl likes climbing mountains very much.
Combinations:
I The USA is famous for the Rocky Mountains.
2 The mountainous jungles of Central and South America are among the most dangerous areas for tourists.
3 Where once green forests could be seen, there are now only sandy hills.
4 Many young travellers choose a hiking trip on the wooded hills and mountains on the South Island.
5 Over a period of millions of years, high mountains are turned to hilly, and finally into flat lands.
6 Sheep farming is found everywhere on the grassy hills in the east.
Step 4 Practice: Grammar
1. Write the following sentences on the blackboard;
A it is April 1st today.
B it is raining heavily
C it is interesting to visit New Zealand
2. Tell the function of “it” in each sentence.
A) Impersonal “it “can be used to talk about time, date, distance, conditions or weather.
B) “It” can be used in the subject position to stand fro the infinitive or a clause. We usually call it “formal subject”
Do first one together with the whole class to make sure the students know what to do. Then let them do the exercise individually. Check the answers with the students.
Answers to Exercise 1:
1 It is very exciting to receive a letter from a foreign friend.
2 It is not a good habit to eat too much junk food.
3 It is dangerous to drive too fast.
4 It is bad manners to talk with your mouth full.
5 It is a pleasure to see you again.
6 It has always been her dream to study abroad.
Answers to Exercise 2:
1 It is strange that you don't know where New Zealand
2 It is wonderful that they are going to invite me to dinner.
3 It was not surprising that he failed his maths exam.
4 It was a shock to all that his secretary stole the money.
Answers to Exercise“3:
1 It is always sunny in Hainan.
2 It takes about 20 minutes to get to the airport.
3 It is the third of April today. or: Today, it is the third of April.
4 It is a good idea to bring something to eat on the train.
（四）总结扩展
Step 5 Summary
Have we ever tiled to make snacks or seen our mother make snacks. Let’s try to write the recipe for your favorite dish. Before writing, you should read Tips first.
Step 6 Homework
Period 4 第四节
（一） 明确目标
1. Review the language points learnt last period.
2. Do some reading about Snacks.
3. Do some writing to develop the students writing skill.
(二) 整体感知
Step 1 Presentation
Every day I have food. Food makes us feel full and happy and it also helps to build our bodies. But have you ever thought what you eat is junk food or healthy food? Today we’re going to learn something about food.
（三）教学过程
Step 1 Question the students on some language points
Step 2 Integrating skills
We have learnt how to give advice. Now let’s try to write letters giving advice. Here in our textbook there are letters asking for some advice. Read them quickly, then write down four pieces of advice for each of them using ”had better (not) , “ought (not) to or should (not) .
Many students like having snacks. Is the habit good or bad? Let s read “Snacks”.
As mentioned in relation to the main reading passage, articles that describe countries or regions follow a certain fixed pattern. Paragraphs need not be very long, but give the most important facts about a country. It is very important that these. facts are correct. Ask students to read the passage, and just as for the main reading, ask the students to write down key words that indicate what each paragraph is about or invent a title for each paragraph. That could look as follows:
Paragraph 1: People Population
Paragraph 2: Culture Culture, language
Paragraph 3: Economy Farming, industry and economy
When students should write a description of a country or region, the paragraph structure of their essay or article may be as follows:
Paragraph 1: Location and area
Paragraph 2: Boundaries and neighbours
Paragraph 3: Landscape and rivers
Paragraph 4: Climate
Paragraph 5: Nature and environment Paragraph
Paragraph 6: History
Paragraph 7: Population
Paragraph 8: Language and religion
Paragraph 9: Economy
10: Life and culture
Step 3 Listening to the Passage
Step 4 Reading comprehension
After fast reading, do the following True-or-False exercises.
Give the students some explanations when necessary.
Step 5 Writing
Now let s have some listening training.
CHINA
Geography
China is a very large country. From the north to the south is more than 5,500 km, and from the east to west more than 5,000 km. Covering an area of 9.6 million square km, which is about one-fifteenth of the earth's land area or about the same size as Europe, China is the world's third largest country behind Russia and Canada.
China's borders are about 20,000 km in length, so it has many neighbours in all directions. To the east, China shares borders with Korea and Russia. Russia also borders on China in the north and northwest. Mongolia lies to the north. To the east are a number of smaller countries. In the south China also has several southeast Asian neighbours such as Myanmar and Vietnam.
China has a more than 18,000-km-long coast. To the , east, there are the Bohai Sea, the Yellow Sea, the East China Sea and the South China Sea. The Pacific is off the eastern shore of the Taiwan Island. There are more than 5,000 islands of different sizes, the largest of which are Taiwan and Hainan Island. Countries separated from China by the sea are, from north to south, South Korea, Japan and the Philippines.
The total length of China's rivers is more than 220,000 km. Most rivers flow from the west to the east. The Yangtze River and the Yellow River are among the biggest rivers in the world. 65 % of the Chinese mainland is covered by mountains and hills. The 8,848-metre-high Mount Qomolangma is the highest mountain in the world. Beijing is the capital of the People's Republic of China and the nation's political, economic and cultural centre.
Climate and nature
Being such a big country, China has different climates in parts of the country. Winter in the north is very cold and dry from October to March and April the following year. The northern part of Heilongjiang Province in the northeast has long winter but no summer, while Hainan Island in the south has a long summer but no winter. The western part of Qinghai and Tibet are covered by snow all year round. On the other hand, the southern part of Yunan and Guizhou are spring-like in all seasons. Along the southeastern coast, the rainfall can be as much as 1,500 millimetres a year, while the northeast may only get as little as 50 millimetres over a whole year.
Because of its size, different environments and differences in climates, China is home to the largest number of wild plants and animals in the world. Many animals only live in China, such as the giant panda, golden monkey and the Chinese alligator.
Population, language and religion
China has a population of over 1.3 billion. The density is highest in the east along the coast, where there are about 550 people per square km. The population density in West China is low, having no more than 50 people per square km. More thaJ? 300 million Chinese people live in cities, and more than 800 million live in the countryside.
There are 55 different cultural minorities in China. By far the largest are the Han. The majority of the people speak Putonghua, while various local dialects are spoken by people all around China. Many of the ethnic minorities speak their own languages. They have also kept their own culture.
Each ethnic group has its own habits and customs, and believes in one religion or another. Besides Taoism, Buddhism and Islam there are also Christian churches in China.
（四）总结扩展
Step 6 Necessary language points
Today we ve done some listening and speaking, and learn how to give advice and some everyday English used between doctors and patients.
1>New Zealand has a population of about 3.8 million people.
population [用法]n. 人口;人口数
[举例]What is the population of London? 伦敦的人口是多少？
London has a population of ten million. 伦敦有一千万人口。
The population of this country rose by 10 percent. 这个国家的人口增长了百分之十。
2>The happier events are marked with speeches, singing and dancing.
be marked with [用法]1.做记号于; 2.标志;表示...的特征
[举例]The box of eggs was marked “With Care”. 这个鸡蛋盒标上了“小心”字样。
3>New Zealand is an agricultural country,with cattle farming on the North Island.
cattle [用法]n. 牛；牲口；家畜 （复数含义）
[举例]Cattle feed on grass. 牛以草为食。
They keep a large herd of cattle. 他们饲养着一大群牛。
That is a cattle farm. 那是畜牧场。
4>The main exports of the country are wool,lamb and forest products.
export [用法]vt. 输出，出口 n.1.输出品 2.输出，出口
[举例]Many raw materials are exported to foreign countries. 许多原料输出国外。
Both imports and exports continue to grow in volume. 进出口量继续增长。
5>Some farmers turned to keeping deer.
turn to [用法]转向
[举例]After he left the university,he became a teacher,but later turned to journalism.
大学毕业后,他先当了老师,但后来转了行,干新闻工作了.
keep [用法]vt. 赡养，供养；饲养
[举例]We were forbidden to keep a single bird of our own.
我们哪怕只喂养一只鸟儿也不允许。
6>New Zealand wine is of high quality and is sold all over the world.
of high quality [用法]of加抽象名词，相当于形容词的作用
[举例]of great value 很有价值; of no use 没用; of a size 一样大小; of an age 年龄一样大;
Step 7 Homework
Period 5 第五节
（一）明确目标
1. Do some listening to improve the students listening ability.
2. Making simple dialogues to train the students speaking ability.
（二）整体感知
Step 1 Presentation
Today we come to the Workbook and do the listening comprehension and also do some talking practice.
（三）教学过程
Step 2 Listening comprehension
LISTENNING TEXT
Lily is a Chinese student who now studies at Auckland University. Listen to the interview in which she is asked about her experiences and her life in New Zealand. In the dialogues, I = Interviewer, L = Lily
I: Why did you come to New Zealand?
L: My dream was to go to England. However, New Zealand is also an English-speaking country. I was told that kiwis are very friendly and honest. My parents also liked the idea of my going to New Zealand. It's safer here. Life is easier than in cities such as London or New York. It's also cheaper.
I: What was you first impression of Auckland?
L: When I first arrived here, two years ago, I thought “wow! This place is so beautifu1.” Just imagine, if you look around and most of what you see is the most beautiful blue and the most beautiful green, the ocean and the hills, that you've ever seen.
I: And how do you feel about Auckland now?
L: During the three months, I felt quite lonely. Auckland has a population of about 1.3 million, so when you come from China, you feel it's a very small city. I: Wasn't it easy to make friends with other Chinese students?
L: I met some of them, and of course 'also made some friends. But my teachers told me I'd better make friends with other international students or kiwis. I'd have more fun, and it would be better for my English.
I: So what do you do after school?
L: Everyone who first comes to New Zealand will feel that life is very boring here. You have to discover the way kiwis enjoy their life.
I: How's that?
L: Kiwis look for fun that is close to nature. They go with friends, hiking in the mountains, or looking for all kinds of fun in and around the water: sailing, diving or swimming in the ocean or building a fire on the beach.
Answers to Exercise 1: 1T 2F 3F 4F
Answers to Exercise 2:
1 Lily decided to go to New Zealand because it is an English-speaking country, and life is safer, easier and cheaper than in England or America.
2 No. During the first three months Lily felt quite lonely.
3 Lily was advised to make friends with international students and kiwis, so she would have more fun and could practice
her English more.
4 When she talks about “kiwis”, Lily means the people from New Zealand.
5
Feeling good about Feeling bad about
Auckland is very beautiful. Auckland is quite a small city.
New Zealand is safe. Life in New Zealand seemed boring.
Life in Auckland is easy. (
Life in Auckland is cheap.
Answers to Exercise 3:
Fun close to nature Fun in the big city
Hiking in the mountains. Go to the cinema.
Sailing. Go to a bar.
Diving. Go to a dancing (discotheque).
Swimming in the ocean. Go to a shopping centre.
Building a fire on the beach.
Step 3 Talking practice
Sample dialogue: O = British official, M = Maori leader, F = British farmer, J = Judge
J: Welcome everybody. Today, we'll discuss the claim of the Maori leader that a piece of land should be returned to the Maori. I hope we can have a quiet and peaceful discussion about this matter and that all arguments will be listened to and respected by everyone. Let's first listen to what the Maori leader has to say.
M: Our ancestors allowed the British to use the land in the Agreement, but the time has come to return the land because the Maori families in the village want to use it.
F: We will not give back the land. My great-grandfather bought this piece of land, so it now belongs to our family. Our family has lived here for three generations, so. we feel the right to stay on the land.
M: But our ancestors lived on the land for many generations before your family arrived in New Zealand. It is true that we allowed them to share the land with us, but we never meant to give the land away.
O: But you can't come and ask us to give the land back after such a long time. The farmer's family have lived there for many years. Besides, the Maori have given us the land, so we sold it to the farmer's family. In the Agreement it was agreed that the British would rule the country and that all people, the Maori as well as the British settlers would have the same rights. Therefore, the farmer's family have the right to stay on the land.
M: We have waited 'for too many years: In the past, we have often asked the government to give the land back to us. But they never did. This piece of land is important to the Maori families. It needs to be given back, so they can honour their ancestors. The Maori family have agreed to let the farmer have another piece of land on the south side of the town.
F: No. We understand that Maori culture is important, but we feel we have a right to stay here. We don't want another piece of land. Besides, if the Maori family wants to honour their ancestors on my land, they are welcome to do so.
Step 4 Sample talking
Step 5 Summary 小结
Step 7 Homework
Period 6 第六节
（一）明确目标
1. Discuss all the answers to the exercises in the Workbook.
2. Learn to use the grammar knowledge
3. Further develop the students’ writing skills.
（二）整体感知
Step 1 Presentation
In the class
（三）教学过程
Step 2 Vocabulary
Answers to Exercise 1:
Across: 1 island 3 harbour 4 climate 7 surface 8 volcano 9 hilly
Down: 2 seaside 3 hot spring 5 bay 6 region
Answers to Exercise 2:
is taking off / will take off / takes off; took possession of; have taken place; have been taken in; takes off; takes out
Step 3 Grammar
Answers to Exercise 1:
1 “It” is used as subject, referring to “to run a business successfully in this area”.
2 “It”, used as impersonal subject, refers to the weather.
3 “It” is, used as impersonal subject, referring to “some children crying in the burning house”.
4 “It”, used as impersonal subject, refers to the distance.
5 “It”, used as impersonal subject, refers to time.
6 “It” is used as subject, referring to “to know about the history of the islands”.
7 “It” is used as the subject of the object clause, refer ring to “to walk alone in the forest near the coast”,
8 “It”, used as impersonal subject, refers to the weather.
Translation for the sentences
1 在这个地区很难把生意做红火。
2 广播里说今天晚些时候的天气会是阴有小雨。
3 失火的房子里有孩子在哭叫，这太可怕了。
4 从这儿到那个岛屿，路途遥远。
5 抢劫者大约是下午四点入银行抢劫的。
6 了解这个岛屿的历史一定很有意思。
7 有人告诉我，在海岸附近的树林里独自行走是很危险的。
8 我们只能等到雨停了以后才能离开。
Answers to Exercise 2:
1 It is moving that the PLA soldiers rescued the villagers from the flood.
2 It has been three months since the villagers came to settle in their new homes.
3 It would be impolite to attend a wedding without bringing a gift.
4 It is April 30 today. I have asked leave to attend my grandfather's burial.
5 It is challenging to do import and export business.
6 It is only a two hours' bicycle ride from the city centre to the cottage where a party is being held.
Answers to Exercise 3:
Sample sentences:
Mexico City is the capital of Mexico. It is the largest city in Mexico. It is also one of the largest cities in the world with a population of 20 million people. The city lies 2,240 metres above sea level and it is surrounded by mountains. The climate there is very pleasant. During the hottest months, it is about 21°C, while during the coldest months it is about 10°C. It never gets too hot or too cold. It is a cultural centre not only in Mexico but in all of Latin American.
There are some things you have to bear in mind when travelling in Mexico City. First of all, drink only bottled water. It is important to wash fruit and vegetables with bottled water before eating them. It would be better if you peel them. It is polite to greet each other with a handshake. It is a usual practice to tip those who have offered you their services. The tip is 10_ 15% of the bill. It is not necessary to wear a heavy coat; comfortable and light clothes will do. But since it's cool in the evening, you'd better bring a warm jacket. If you want to use public telephones, then it is necessary to buy a phone card. It would cause unnecessary danger if you wear expensive jewellery or carry a lot of money on you.,
Step 4 Integrating skills
We have learnt how to give advice. Now let’s try to write letters giving advice. Here in our textbook there are letters asking for some advice. Read them quickly, then write down four pieces of advice for each of them using “had better (not) , ”ought (not) to or should (not) .
Many students like having snacks. Is the habit good or bad? Let s read “Snacks\".
Step 5 Listening to the Passage
Step 6 Reading comprehension
After fast reading, do the following True-or-False exercises.
Answers to Exercise 1:
1 A 2 C 3 C 4 B and D 5 B
Answers to Exercise 2:
1 Chinese people moved to New Zealand during the 1850 to look for gold.
2 The early Chinese settlers were more skilled at set ting up and running businesses than settlers from other countries.
3 Suggested answers for the chart:
Name country job
James Bertram New Zealand writer
Edgar Snow USA writer
Kathleen Hall New Zealand nurse
Norman Bethune Canada doctor
Rewi Alley New Zealand teacher/writer
Sydney Shapiro USA writer
George Hatem USA doctor
Agnes Smedley USA writer
Step 7 Sample writng
With the reading materials presented in this unit and the materials collected by the students during the project, students should have a lot of material to choose from for writing a short essay about New Zealand.
Sample essay:
New Zealand lies in the southwest Pacific Ocean, nearly 2,000 km from Australia. New Zealand is over 1,600 kilometres long, and its widest part is 450 kilometres. The capital city is Wellington, with a population of about 360,000. Wellington's central position was the most important reason to make it the capital in 1865. Before 1865, Auckland had been the capital.
Auckland is the largest city with a population having just reached 1.3 million. The total population of New Zealand is 3.8 million. Maori make up about 15% of the population, and are the native people of New Zealand. Most Maori live in the North Island.
New Zealand is an island nation. The three main islands which make up New Zealand are the North Island, the South Island, and Stewart Island, but a number of smaller offshore islands are also included. About 23% of the country is covered by forest. Most forests are now protected areas. New Zealand is a very mountainous country. Among them are a number of volcanoes. Small earthquakes are quite common.
New Zealand has a sea climate. The North Island has a mild climate, while winter conditions in certain areas of the South Island may drop to near arctic conditions. New Zealand's weather is very changeable. A sudden rain shower will give way just as suddenly to sunny skies, or a strong wind. In general, the country experiences high rainfall, especially in winter. The east coast of New Zealand is the driest area, while the west coast of the South Island has one of the highest rainfalls a year in the world. January and February are the warmest months in New Zealand; July and August are the coolest.
Agriculture is the most important economy of New Zealand. New Zealand has 13 times as many sheep as people. Since the 1970s, New Zealand tourism has developed.
New Zealand's creative culture has grown from a magic mix of cultures - Maori, Polynesian, Asian and every kind of European. Many New Zealand artists are now enjoying success around the world.
（四）总结扩展
Step 5 Summary
Have we ever tiled to make snacks or seen our mother make snacks. Let’s try to write the recipe for your favorite dish. Before writing, you should read Tips first.
4. Workbook
1>Despite the fact that New Zealand is so far away,ties have existed between the nations from early on.
Despite [用法]见高一上册 unit 1
the fact that... [用法]that引导的是同位语从句，表示fact的内容。
exist [用法]vi.存在；生存，生活
[举例]We cannot exist without air. 没有空气，我们就不能生存。
Does life exist on other planets? 别的行星上有生命吗？
2>The first wave of Chinese settlers arrived around the middle of the 19th cenrury.
wave [用法]n. 波，波浪，浪潮
[举例]A big wave swept the man off the boat. 巨浪把那个人卷下船去。
3>Among the first settlers, the Chinese were more skilled at setting up and running business.
skilled [用法]adj. 熟练的,老练的,有技巧的 (+at/in/with)
[举例]A skilled technician takes years to train. 一个熟练的技师需要数年时间才能培训出来。
Welding is a highly skilled job. 焊接是一个非常技术性的工作。
4>In Hubei Province, Kathleen, known to Chinese people as Nurse Ho ran a small hospital.
known [用法](无比较级、最高级)所知的; 已知的
[举例]He is known to the public. 他的名字为大众 [警察当局] 所知晓。
5>Over the past 10-15 years, large numbers of Chinese students have travelled to New Zealand to study.
over the past 10-15 years [用法]prep. 在…期间
[例句]Over the years,he read widely. 在那些年中，他博览群书。
He came to town over the weekend. 周末他进城了。
large numbers of [用法]同a large number of,修饰复数名词.
Step 7 Homework
Period 7 第七节
1． 检查本单元单词、短语及相关句型。
2． 讲评统一布置的课外基础练习。
